FANUC Power Mate *-MODEL D
FANUC Power Mate *-MODEL H
PARAMETER MANUAL
B-63180EN/03
� No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
� All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all thevarious matters.However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible inthis manual should be regarded as ”impossible”.
PREFACE B–63180EN/03
p–1
�������
The mode covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL D Power Mate i–D Power Mate i
FANUC Power Mate i–MODEL H Power Mate i–H
Power Mate i
Power Mate
The table below lists manuals related to power Mate i–MODEL D/H. Inthe table, this manual is maked with an asterisk (*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Manual name SpecificationNumber
DESCRIPTIONS B–63172EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) B–63173EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (Function) B–63173EN–1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63174EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63175EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B–63180EN *PROGRAMMING MANUAL(Macro Compiler / Macro Executor)
B–62093E–1
FANUC LADDER–III OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–66234EN
FANUC PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE)
B–61863E
The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi/βiseries
Manual name Specificationnumber
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis seriesFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi seriesDESCRIPTIONS
B–65262EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS
B–65272EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis seriesDESCRIPTIONS
B–65302EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi seriesDESCRIPTIONS
B–65312EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi seriesDESCRIPTIONS
B–65282EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi seriesDESCRIPTIONS
B–65322EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αis seriesFANUC SERVO MOTOR αi seriesFANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi seriesFANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi seriesMAINTENANCE MANUAL
B–65285EN
Related Manuals
Related manuals ofSERVO MOTOR αi/βi series
B–63180EN/03 PREFACE
p–2
Manual nameSpecification
number
FANUC SERVO MOTOR βis seriesFANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi seriesFANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi seriesMAINTENANCE MANUAL
B–65325EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series (I/O Link Option)MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B–65395EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis seriesFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi seriesFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis seriesPARAMETER MANUAL
B–65270EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi seriesFANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi seriesPARAMETER MANUAL
B–65280EN
The servo motors and spindle motors (only for the Power Mate i–D) listedabove can be connected to the CNCs described in this manual.
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR β series
Manual name Specificationnumber
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series DESCRIPTIONS B–65232EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series MAINTENANCEMANUAL
B–65235EN
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series (I/O Link Option)MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B–65245EN
Related manuals of I/O–Unit and other
Manual name Specificationnumber
FANUC PROFIBUS–DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62924EN
FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER BOARDOPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63354EN
FANUC FAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER BoardOPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63644EN
FANUC FL–net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63434EN
FANUC DeviceNet BOARD OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63404EN
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A CONNECTION/MAINTENANCEMANUAL
B–61813E
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B CONNECTION/MAINTENANCEMANUAL
B–62163E
FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL B–62714EN
Related manuals of OPEN CNC
Manual name Specificationnumber
FANUC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL (LADDER EDITING PACKAGE)
B–62884EN
FANUC OPEN CNC OPERATOR’S MANUAL(Basic Operation Package 1 (for Windows 95/NT))
B–62994EN
Related manuals ofSERVO MOTOR β series
Related manuals ofI/O–Unit and other
Related manuals ofOPEN CNC
B–63180EN/03 Table of Contents
c–1
PREFACE p-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. DISPLAYING PARAMETERS 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THEREADER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 5. . . . . . . .
3.2 INPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 6. . . . . . . . . .
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 PARAMETERS OF SETTING 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Parameters Common to all Channels 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 PARAMETERS OF I/O LINK–II 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 PARAMETERS OF DPL/MDI OPERATION PACKAGE AND DPL/MDI 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 PARAMETERS OF ETHERNET (FOR DPL/MDI OPERATION PACKAGE AND DPL/MDI) 21. .
4.6 PARAMETERS OF POWER MATE CNC MANAGER 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATES 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9 PARAMETERS OF STROKE CHECK 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12 PARAMETERS OF SERVO 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14 PARAMETERS OF PULSE SIGNAL OUTPUT FUNCTION 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15 PARAMETERS OF MDI, DISPLAY, AND EDIT 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17 PARAMETERS OF PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION (OPTIONAL FUNCTION WITH Power Mate i–H) 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.19 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.20 PARAMETERS OF CANNED CYCLES 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.20.1 Parameter of canned Cycle for Drilling 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.22 PARAMETERS OF POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23 PARAMETERS OF STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.24 PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.25 PARAMETERS OF PATTERN DATA INPUT 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.26 PARAMETERS OF POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.27 PARAMETERS OF SKIP FUNCTION 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.28 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63180EN/03Table of Contents
c–2
4.29 PARAMETERS OF PICTURE DISPLAY 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.30 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAYING OPERATION TIME AND NUMBER OF PARTS 174. . . . . . . . . .
4.31 PARAMETERS OF POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.32 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED, HANDLE INTERRUPTION DIRECTION 180. . . .
4.33 PARAMETERS OF REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER 184. . . .
4.34 PARAMETERS OF SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.35 PARAMETERS OF THE EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.36 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.37 PARAMETERS OF ELECTRONIC CAM 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.38 PARAMETERS OF TWO–PATH CONTROL 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.39 PARAMETERS RELATED TO THE INTER–UNIT DATA SHARING FUNCTION 206. . . . . . . . . . .
4.40 PARAMETERS RELATED TO THE PACEMAKER FUNCTION 207. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.41 PARAMETERS OF DEVICE INPUT 208. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.42 PARAMETERS OF SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.43 PARAMETERS OF MULTIAXIS SYNCHRONIZATION 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.44 PARAMETERS RELATED TO THE INTER–UNIT DATA SHARING FUNCTION (2) 217. . . . . . . .
4.45 PARAMETERS OF HIGH–SPEED POSITION SWITCHES 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.46 PARAMETERS OF C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR AND MACRO EXECUTOR 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.47 PARAMETERS OF HIGH–SPEED RESPONSE (1) 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.48 OTHER PARAMETERS 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX
A. CHARACTER CODE LIST 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63180EN/03 1. DISPLAYING PARAMETERS
1
1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS
Follow the procedure below to display parameters.
(1) Press the <SYSTEM> function key on the MDI as many times asrequired, or alternatively, press the <SYSTEM> function key once,then the PARAM section display soft key. The parameter screen isthen selected.
PARAMETER (FEEDRATE) O0001 N12345
1401 RDR JZR RF0 LRP RPD0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1402 DLF HFC0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1410 DRY RUN FEEDRATE 100001411 INIT.CUTTING F 01420 RAPID FEEDRATE X 15000
Y 15000 Z 15000
> AUTO STRT MTN FIN *** 10:02:35[PARAM] [DGNOS] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM] [(OPRT)]
Cursor
Soft key display(section select)
��� PROGOFFSETSETTING
SYSTEM MESSAGEGRAPH
Function key
Return menu key Soft key Continuous menu key
CUSTOM
(2) The parameter screen consists of multiple pages. Use step (a) or (b)to display the page that contains the parameter you want to display.
(a) Use the page select key or the cursor move keys to display the de-sired page.
(b) Enter the data number of the parameter you want to display fromthe keyboard, then press the [NO.SRH] soft key. The parameterpage containing the specified data number appears with the cur-sor positioned at the data number. (The data is displayed in re-verse video.)
NOTEIf key entry is started with the section select soft keysdisplayed, they are replaced automatically by operationselect soft keys including [NO.SRH]. Pressing the [(OPRT)]soft key can also cause the operation select keys to bedisplayed.
> AUTO STRT MTN FIN *** 10:02:34[NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [ OFF:0 ] [+INPUT] [INPUT ] ← Soft key display
(section select)
← Data entered fromthe keyboard
B–63180EN/032. SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI
2
2 SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI
Follow the procedure below to set parameters.
1 Follow the substeps below to enable writing of parameters.
1-1 To display the setting screen, press the <OFFSET/SETTING>function key as many times as required, or alternatively press the<OFFSET/SETTING> function key once, then the [SETING]section select soft key. The first page of the setting screen appears.
1-2 Position the cursor on “PARAMETER WRITE” using thecursor move keys.
SETTING (HANDY) O0001 N00010
PARAMETER WRITE = (0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE)TV CHECK = 0 (0:OFF 1:ON)PUNCH CODE = 0 (0:EIA 1:ISO)INPUT UNIT = 0 (0:MM 1:INCH)I/O CHANNEL = 0 (0–2:CHANNEL NO.)
0
1-3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys.
> MDI STOP *** *** *** 10:03:02[NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [ OFF:0 ] [+INPUT] [INPUT]
← Soft key display(section select)
1-4 To set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 1, press the ON:1 soft key,or alternatively enter 1 and press the INPUT soft key. From nowon, the parameters can be set. At the same time an alarmcondition (P/S100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE) occurs inthe CNC.
2 To display the parameter screen, press the <SYSTEM> function keyas many times as required, or alternatively press the <SYSTEM>function key once, then the [PARAM] section select soft key.(See “1. Displaying Parameters.”)
3 Display the page containing the parameter you want to set, andposition the cursor on the parameter. (See “1. Displaying Parameters.”)
4 Enter data, then press the [INPUT] soft key. The parameter indicatedby the cursor is set to the entered data.
B–63180EN/03 2. SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI
3
[Example] 12000 [INPUT]
PARAMETER (FEEDRATE) O0001 N00010
1401 RDR JZR RPD0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1402 JRV0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1410 DRY RUN FEEDRATE1412 01420 RAPID FEEDRATEX 15000
Y 15000Z 15000
12000
> MDI STOP *** *** ALM 10:03:10[NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [ OFF:0 ] [+INPUT] [INPUT]
Cursor
Data can be entered continuously for parameters, starting at the selectedparameter, by separating each data item with a semicolon (;).
[Example] Entering 10;20;30;40 and pressing the [INPUT] key assigns values 10,20, 30, and 40 to parameters in order starting at the parameter indicatedbythe cursor.5 Repeat steps 6 and 7 as required.
6 If parameter setting is complete, set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 0on the setting screen to disable further parameter setting.
7 Reset the NC to release the alarm condition (P/S100).If an alarm condition (P/S000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) occursin the NC, turn it off before continuing operation.
B–63180EN/03
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
4
3INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THEREADER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
This section explains the parameter input/output procedures forinput/output devices connected to the reader/puncher interface.The following description assumes the input/output devices are ready forinput/output. It also assumes parameters peculiar to the input/outputdevices, such as the baud rate and the number of stop bits, have been setin advance.
B–63180EN/03
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
5
(1) Select the EDIT mode or set to Emergency stop.
(2) To select the parameter screen, press the <SYSTEM> function key asmany times as required, or alternatively press the <SYSTEM>function key once, then the PARAM section select soft key.
(3) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys, thenpress the forward menu key located at the right–hand side of the softkeys to display another set of operation select keys including[PUNCH].
PARAMETER (FEEDRATE) O0001 N00010
1401 RDR JZR RPD0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1402 JRV0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1410 DRY RUN FEEDRATE1412 01420 RAPID FEEDRATEX 15000
Y 15000Z 15000
12000
> MDI STOP *** *** ALM 10:03:10 [NO.SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] [+INPUT] [INPUT]
Cursor
State displaySoft key display (operation select)
(4) Pressing the [PUNCH] soft key changes the soft key display asshown below:
> EDIT STOP *** *** *** 10:35:03[ ] [ ] [ ] [CANCEL] [ EXEC ]
(5) Press the [EXEC] soft key to start parameter output. Whenparameters are being output, “OUTPUT” blinks in the state displayfield on the lower part of the screen.
> EDIT STOP *** *** *** 10:35:04 OUTPUT[ ] [ ] [ ] [CANCEL] [ EXEC ]
← OUTPUT blinking
(6) When parameter output terminates, “OUTPUT” stops blinking. Pressthe <RESET> key to interrupt parameter output.
3.1OUTPUTTINGPARAMETERSTHROUGH THEREADER/PUNCHERINTERFACE
B–63180EN/03
3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
6
(1) Place the NC in the emergency stop state.
(2) Enable parameter writing.
1. To display the setting screen, press the <OFFSET/SETTING>function key as many times as required, or alternatively press the<OFFSET/SETTING> function key once, then the [SETING]section select soft key. The first page of the setting screen ap-pears.
2. Position the cursor on “PARAMETER WRITE” using the cursormove keys.
3. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys.4. To set “PARAMETER WRITE=” to 1, press the ON:1 soft key,
or alternatively enter 1, then press the [INPUT] soft key. Fromnow on, parameters can be set. At the same time an alarm condi-tion (P/S100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE) occurs in theNC.
(3) To select the parameter screen, press the <SYSTEM> function key asmany times as required, or alternatively press the <SYSTEM> keyonce, then [PARAM] soft key.
(4) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select keys, thenpress the forward menu key located at the right–hand side of the softkeys to display another set of operation select soft keys including[READ].
> EDIT STOP ALM 10:37:30[ ] [ READ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]
–EMG– ALM
← Soft key display← State display
(5) Pressing the [READ] soft key changes the soft key display as shownbelow:
> EDIT STOP ALM 10:37:30[ ] [ ] [ ] [CANCEL] [ EXEC ]
–EMG– ALM
(6) Press the [EXEC] soft key to start inputting parameters from theinput/output device. When parameters are being input, “INPUT”blinks in the state display field on the lower part of the screen.
> EDIT STOP ALM 10:37:30 INPUT[ ] [ ] [ ] [CANCEL] [ EXEC ]
–EMG– ALM ← INPUT blinking
(7) When parameter input terminates, “INPUT” stops blinking. Press the<RESET> key to interrupt parameter input.
(8) When parameter read terminates, “INPUT” stops blinking, and analarm condition (P/S000) occurs in the NC. Turn it off beforecontinuing operation.
3.2INPUTTINGPARAMETERSTHROUGH THE READER/PUNCHERINTERFACE
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
7
4 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Table 4 Data Types and Valid Data Ranges of Parameters
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit0 or 1
Bit axis0 or 1
Byte –128 to 1270 to 255
In some parameters, signs areignored.Byte axis
–128 to 1270 to 255
In some parameters, signs areignored.
Word –32768 to 327670 to 65535
In some parameters, signs areignored.Word axis
–32768 to 327670 to 65535
In some parameters, signs areignored.
2–word–99999999 to 99999999
2–word axis–99999999 to 99999999
NOTE1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a single data
number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a differentmeaning.
2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for eachcontrol axis.
3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a generalrange. The range varies according to the parameters. Forthe valid data range of a specific parameter, see theexplanation of the parameter.
(1) Notation of bit type and bit axis type parameters
[Example]#7
0000#6 #5
SEQ#4 #3 #2
INI#1ISO
#0TVC
Data #0 to #7 are bit positions.Data No.
(2) Notation of parameters other than bit type and bit axis type
1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis
Data.Data No.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
8
NOTE1 The bits left blank in 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
and parameter numbers that appear on the display but arenot found in the parameter list are reserved for futureexpansion. They must always be 0.
2 Parameters having different meanings between the PowerMate i–D and Power Mate i–H and parameters that are validonly for the T or M series are indicated in two levels as shownbelow. Parameters left blank are unavailable.Example1
IPR and ISC represent parameters common to the PowerMate i–D and Power Mate i–H, and ISA represents aparameter specific to the Power Mate i–H.
Example2The example below indicates that the parameter is specificto the Power Mate i–D only.
1004PMi–D
PMi–H
#7IPR
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ISC
#0
IPR ISC ISA
3736Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor PMi–D
PMi–H
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
9
#70000
#6 #5SEQ
#4 #3 #2INI
#1ISO
#0TVC
The following parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Bit
TVC TV check0 : Not performed1 : Performed
ISO Code used for data output0 : EIA code1 : ISO code
INI Unit of input0 : In mm1 : In inches
SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers0: Not performed1: Performed
When a program is prepared by using MDI keys in the part programstorage and edit mode, a sequence number can automatically be assignedto each block in set increments. Set the increment to parameter 3216.
#7SJZ0002
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
The following parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Bit
SJZ Manual reference position si performed as follows:0 : When no reference position has been set, reference position return is
performed using deceleration dogs. When a reference position isalready set, reference position return is performed using rapid traverseand deceleration dogs are ignored.
1 : Reference position return is performed using deceleration dogs at alltimes.
NOTESJZ is enabled when bit 3 (HJZ) of parameter No.1005 isset to 1. When a reference position is set without a dog,(i.e. when bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No.1002 is set to 1 orbit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No.1005 is set to 1) referenceposition return after reference position setting isperformed using rapid traverse at all times, regardless ofthe setting of SJZ.
4.1PARAMETERS OFSETTING
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
10
#7RMVx0012
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0MIRx
The following parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Bit axis
MIRx Mirror image for each axis0 : Mirror image is off.1 : Mirror image is on.
RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis0 : Not released1 : Released
NOTERMVx is valid when RMBx in parameter 1005#7 is 1.
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device
The following parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 2, 4, 6, 7, 20 to 35
The CNC provides the following interfaces for data transfer to and fromthe host computer and external input/output devices:
� Input/output device interface (RS–232C serial port 1 or 2)
This parameter selects the interface used to transfer data to and from aninput/output device.
Setting Description0, 1 RS–232C serial port 1
2 RS–232C serial port 24 Memory card Interface (on the main unit side)6 DNC1/Ethernet (for DNC operation only)7 Memory card interface (on the touch panel side)
20to35
Data input/output with the Power Mate in group 0 through an I/O LinktoData input/output with the Power Mate in group 15 through an I/O Link
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
11
NOTE� An input/output device can also be selected using the setting screen. Usually, the setting screen
is used.� The specifications (such as the baud rate and the number of stop bits) of the input/output
devices to be connected must be set in the corresponding parameters for each interfacebeforehand. (See Section 4.2.) I/O CHANNEL = 0 and I/O CHANNEL = 1 represent input/outputdevices connected to RS–232C serial port 1. Separate parameters for the baud rate, stop bits,and other specifications are provided for each channel.
� The input/output unit interface may be referred to as the reader/punch interface.RS–232C serial port 1 and RS–232C serial port 2 are also referred to as channel 1 and channel2, respectively.
4 Channel 2 has no control line, so that the Handy File and Floppy Cassette cannot be connected.
Power Mate i
RS–232–C serial port 1/2R232 (JD42A)
I/O CHANNEL=0, 1
(Channel 1)
I/O CHANNEL=2
(Channel 2)
������� �� device
������� �� device
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
12
The parameters described below must be set up to use an I/O unit interface(RS–232–C serial port), remote buffer interface, or memory card interfacefor inputting and outputting data (such as programs and parameters)between external input/output units and memory cards.The I/O CHANNEL setting parameter is used to select a desiredinput/output unit by specifying the channel (RS–232–C serial port 1,RS–232–C serial port 2, or remote buffer interface) to which theinput/output unit is connected. This is true also when the memoryinterface is used.The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of aninput/output device connected to a specific channel of I/O device interfacemust be set in parameters for that channel in advance.For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/outputdevice data are provided.The following shows the interrelation between the input/output deviceinterface parameters for the channels of I/O device interface.
Stop bit and other data
Number specified for the input/output device
Baud rate
Stop bit and other data
Number specified for the input/output device
Baud rate
Stop bit and other data
Number specified for the input/output device
Baud rate
I/ O CHANNEL
=0 : Channel1
=1 : Channel1
=2 : Channel2
Specify a channel for an in-
put/output device.
I/O CHANNEL=1
(channel 1)
0020 0101
0102I/O CHANNEL=0
(channel 1)
0103
0111
0112
0113
0121
0122I/O CHANNEL=2
(channel 2)
0123
I/O CHANNEL
Input/output channel number (parameter No.0020)↓
Fig.4.2 I/O Device Interface Settings
4.2PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHERINTERFACE
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
13
0024 Port for communication with the PMC ladder development tool
[Data type] Byte
This parameter sets the port to be used for communication with the PMCladder development tool (FANUC LADDER–II/III, Ladder EditingPackage).
0 : HSSB (COP7)1 : RS–232C serial port 1 (JD42)
2 : RS–232C serial port 2 (JD42)
The following parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
#7ENS
0100
#6IOP
#5ND3
#4 #3NCR
#2 #1CTV
#0
ENS IOP NCR CTV
[Data type] Bit
CTV: Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.0 : Performed1 : Not performed
NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code0 : LF, CR, CR are output.1 : Only LF is output.
ND3 In DNC operation, a program is:0 : Read block by block. (A DC3 code is output for each block.)1 : Read continuously until the buffer becomes full. (A DC3 code is
output when the buffer becomes full.)
NOTEIn general, reading is performed more efficiently when ND3set to 1. This specification reduces the number of bufferinginterruptions caused by reading of a series of blocksspecifying short movements. This in turn reduces theeffective cycle time.
IOP Specifies how to stop program input/output operations.0 : An NC reset can stop program input/output operations.1 : Only the [STOP] soft key can stop program input/output operations.
(An reset cannot stop program input/output operations.)
ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code0 : An alarm is generated.1 : The NULL code is ignored.
4.2.1Parameters Commonto all Channels
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
14
#7NFD0101
#6 #5 #4 #3ASI
#2 #1 #0SB2
[Data type] Bit type
SB2 The number of stop bits0 : 11 : 2
ASI Code used at data input0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished)1 : ASCII code
NFD Feed before and after the data at data output0 : Output1 : Not output
NOTEWhen input/output devices other than the FANUC PPRare used, set NFD to 1.
0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Byte
Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/OCHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 4.2.2 (a).
��� 4.2.2 (a) Set value and Input/Output Device
Set value Input/output device
0 RS–232–C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/ B2)2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate,
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy FileFANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
5 Portable tape reader6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Byte
Set baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL isset to 0, with a set value in Table 4.2.2 (b).
��� � � � ��
Set value Baud rate (bps)
7 6008 12009 2400
10 480011 960012 19200
4.2.2Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
15
#7NFD0111
#6 #5 #4 #3ASI
#2 #1 #0SB2
[Data type] Bit
These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meaningsof the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte
Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/OCHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table 4.2.2 (a).
0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte
Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL isset to 1, with a value in Table 4.2.2 (b).
#7NFD0121
#6 #5 #4 #3ASI
#2 #1 #0SB2
[Data type] Bit
These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2. The meaningsof the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Data type] Byte
Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/OCHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 4.2.2 (a).
0123 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Data type] Byte
Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL isset to 2, with a value in Table 4.2.2 (b).
4.2.3Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)
4.2.4Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
16
0171 Length of DI data in bytes
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 32
Set the length (in bytes) of the DI (actual transfer data) to be sent from themaster station to the Power Mate i–D/H. A specified number of bytes ofDI data from the PMC area will be stored.
0172 Length of DO data in bytes
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 32
Set the length (in bytes) of the DO (actual transfer data) to be sent from thePower Mate i–D/H to the master station. A specified number of bytes ofDO data from the PMC area will be output.
0173 Station address
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 31
Specify a station address.
0174 Baud rate
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 3
Set the baud rate to be used in communication.Setting value
Baud rate
0 1 Mbps1 500 kbps2 250 kbps3 125 kbps
0180The maximum number of slave stations from which the station of interest can re-ceive data using the global I/O transfer function (the station of interest is included)
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 31
0 : Specifies that the global I/O transfer function be not used.1 to 31 : Specify that the number of slave stations from which the station
of interest receives data using the global I/O (the station ofinterest is included). The input/output data is sent to the R area.
4.3PARAMETERS OFI/O LINK–II
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
17
If the station of interest is #1 and is to receive DO data from slave stations#2 and #3, specify 3.
If the station of interest is #2 and is to receive DO data from slave stations#1 and #3, specify 3.
If the station of interest is #3 and is to receive DO data from slave stations#1 and #2, specify 3.
If the station of interest is #3 and to receive DO data from slave stations#1, #2, and #4, specify 4.
0181 Internal relay address for the beginning of input data
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 999
This parameter is used if the global I/O transfer function is used.
Set the R address for acquiring input data.
0182 Internal relay address for the beginning of output data
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 999
This parameter is used if the global I/O transfer function is used.
Set the R address for acquiring output data.
0187 Internal relay address for the beginning of communication status data
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 999
Set the R address for the status data to be sent.
A 32–byte area (for 32 stations) is unconditionally acquired from thespecified R area.
0188 Communication time–out
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 1 to 1000
Set a communication time–out value. If you specify 0, a default value(300 ms) is used.
NOTERefer to “FANUC I/O Link–II Connection Manual(B–62714EN)” for detailed descriptions about the I/O Link–IIfunction.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
18
#7CNCI0300
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
CNCI When data is input to or output from the memory card interface with theCNC screen display function:0 : Data is input to or output from the drive of the PC.1 : Data is input to or output from the memory card interface of the Power
Mate.
This parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function isactivated.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
19
#7
0370
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PC1
[Data type] Bit
PC1 PC1 If the “DPL/MDI Operation Package” is connected, the CRT displayscreen displays:0 : Absolute coordinates and machine coordinates (using full–size
characters)1 : Only absolute coordinates (using triple–size characters)
NOTE1 If seven or more controlled axes are used, even setting this
parameter to “1” causes the display screen to look the sameas when the parameter is set to “0”.
2 This parameter is also valid when DPL/MDI is used.
0380Time interval at which packets requesting to establish “DPL/MDI OperationPackage” communication are to be sent
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 1000 to 10000 (Usually, set 0, in which case a setting value of 3000 isassumed.)
0381Time interval at which packets for verifying the connection of “DPL/MDI Opera-tion Package” are to be sent
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 1000 to 10000 (Usually, set 0, in which case a setting value of 5000 isassumed.)
0382 Time–out value used in waiting for a “DPL/MDI Operation Package” response packet
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 1000 to 30000 (Usually, set 0, in which case a setting value of 5000 isassumed.)
4.4PARAMETERS OFDPL/MDI OPERATIONPACKAGE ANDDPL/MDI
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
20
0383 Time allowed before a “DPL/MDI Operation Package” key input repetition is detected
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 100 to 3000 (Usually, set 0, in which case a setting value of 1000 isassumed.)
Time allowed before the first key repetition is detected
0384 Time allowed before a “DPL/MDI Operation Package” key input repetition is detected
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 10 to 3000 (Usually, set 0, in which case a setting value of 30 is assumed.)
Time allowed before the second or each subsequent key repetition isdetected
NOTEIf the CPU of the PC is occupied by an application other thanthe “DPL/MDI Operation Package” or the OS for a long time,the Power Mate may automatically disconnect the “DPI/MDIOperation Package”. In this case, you should terminate the“DPL/MDI Operation Package” application on the PC sideand restart it (it will be automatically re–connected). If thissymptom reoccurs frequently, increase the values ofparameter Nos. 381 and 381 until the symptom will reoccurno more.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
21
CAUTIONThe following parameters are valid only if the DPL/MDIOperation Package is used as a display unit.If the CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI is in use, make the necessarysettings using the “Ethernet Parameter” screen.
0704 First part of the IP address of the NC
0705 Second part of the IP address of the NC
0706 Third part of the IP address of the NC
0707 Fourth part of the IP address of the NC
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Specify the IP address of the NC, using four parameters.
Supposing the NC has IP address 192.168.0.1, the four parts of the IPaddress are specified as follows:
First part: 192Second part: 168Third part: 0Fourth part: 1
Specify them in the respective parameters.
0712 First part of the IP address mask address of the network
0713 Second part of the IP address mask address of the network
0714 Third part of the IP address mask address of the network
0715 Fourth part of the IP address mask address of the network
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Specify the IP address mask address of the network, using fourparameters.
Supposing the NC has IP address 255.254.253.0, the four parts of the IPaddress are specified as follows:
First part: 255Second part: 254Third part: 253Fourth part: 0
Specify them in the respective parameters.
4.5PARAMETERS OFETHERNET (FORDPL/MDI OPERATIONPACKAGE ANDDPL/MDI)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
22
0720 First part of the IP address of the router
0721 Second part of the IP address of the router
0722 Third part of the IP address of the router
0723 Fourth part of the IP address of the router
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Specify the IP address of the router, using four parameters.
Supposing IP address 192.168.0.99, the four parts of the IP address arespecified as follows:
First part: 192Second part: 168Third part: 0Fourth part: 99
Specify them in the respective parameters.
0724 Port number for TCP
[Data type] Two–word
[Valid data range] 5001 to 65535
Specify the port number to be used with the DNC1/Ethernet function.
This port number must match the “NC IP address” in the MachineConfiguration dialog box on the PC.
Refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA System Operator’s Manual” forexplanations about what value to specify.
0725 Port number for UDP
[Data type] Two–word
[Valid data range] 5001 to 65535
Specify the port number to be used with the DNC1/Ethernet function.
This port number must match “FANUC_C4_SERVER” in the servicesfile on the PC.
Refer to “FANUC Personal Computer FA System Operator’s Manual” forexplanations about what value to specify.
0726 Time interval
[Data type] Two–word
[Unit of data] 10 ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
Specify the interval at which broadcasts are to be sent.0 to 9 : No broadcast will be sent. An interval shorter than 100 ms
cannot be specified.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
23
#70727
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1RIP
#0TRN
[Data type] Bit
TRN If the DPL/MDI Operation Package or DPL/MDI is in use, setting thisparameter to 1 causes the Ethernet parameters to be sent to the Ethernetboard. The parameter also indicates the result of the parameter transferattempt as follows:0 : The Ethernet board did not accept them.1 : The Ethernet board accepted them.
NOTEWhen any parameter between parameter No. 704 andparameter No. 726 is set, this parameter becomes 0. If thisparameter becomes 1, data is sent to the Ethernet board.This parameter remains set to 1 if the Ethernet boardaccepts the parameters. Otherwise, it becomes 0.If it is 0, re–set the parameters and rerun.
RIP If the DPL/MDI Operation Package or DPL/MDI is in use, router IP addressselection is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.If disabled, the values of parameter Nos. 720 to 723 will not be sent to theEthernet board.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
24
#7DRC0960
#62CH
#5ASG
#4SPW
#3PMN
#2MD2
#1MD1
#0SLV
[Data type] Bit
SLV When the power mate CNC manager is selected, the screen displays:0 : One slave.1 : Up to four slaves with the screen divided into four.
MD1,MD2 These parameters set a slave parameter input/output destination.
MD2 MD1 Input/output destination
0 0 Part program storage0 1 Memory card
In either case, slave parameters are output in program format.
PMN The power mate CNC manager function is:0 : Enabled.1 : Disabled. (Communication with slaves is not performed.)
SPW Slave parameter setting by power mate CNC manager:0 : Is always enabled.1 : Conforms to “Parameter Writing” (PWE) in parameter setting.
ASG Whether the number of bytes assigned to the B amplifier input/output I/Oaddress is 16 bytes will:0 : Not be checked.1 : Be checked.
2CH When there are two I/O Link channels, the Power Mate CNC Manager:0 : Communicates with the second channel. (When the servo amplifier
unit is not connected to the second channel, it communicates with thefirst channel.)
1 : Communicates with the first channel.
DRC When the position 1 screen is displayed, a direct command:0 : Cannot be specified. (Peripheral devices can be controlled.)1 : Can be specified. (The interval at which coordinates are updated
becomes longer.)
4.6PARAMETERS OFPOWER MATE CNCMANAGER
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
25
#70961
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1PAD
#0PAH
NOTEAfter this parameter is set, the power needs to be turned off.
[Data type] Bit
PAH When an alarm occurs in the FANUC SERVO MOTOR βi series (I/OLink option) (the following I/O Link βi), the detail of alarm is:0 : Not recorded as P/S5344 alarm on the alarm history screen.1 : Recorded as P/S5344 alarm on the alarm history screen.
PAD When an alarm occurs in the I/O Link βi, the host CNC:0 : Does not enter alarm state.1 : Enters alarm state.
Parameter settingAlarm information recorded in alarm history
PAD PAHAlarm information recorded in alarm history
0 0 It is not recorded. The CNC does not enter alarmstate.1 0It is not recorded. The CNC does not enter alarmstate.
0 1 Only P/S 5344 alarm is recorded. The CNC doesnot enter alarm state.
1 0 Both P/S 5343 and PS 5344 alarm are recorded.The CNC enters alarm state.
NOTEWhen parameter No.960#3(PMN) is set 0, parameterNo.961#0(PAH) and No.961#1(PAD) are valid.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
26
#71001
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0INM
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
INM Least command increment on the linear axis0 : In mm (metric system machine)1 : In inches (inch system machine)
#7IDG1002
#6 #5 #4 #3AZR
#2 #1DLZ
#0JAX
[Data type] Bit
JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed,manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return0 : 1 axis1 : 3 axes 2 axes(2 axes for Power Mate i–D)
DLZ Function setting the reference position without dog0 : Disabled1 : Enabled (for all axes)
NOTEThis function can be specified for each axis by DLZx, bit 1of parameter No.1005.
AZR When no reference position is set, the G28 command causes:0: Reference position return using deceleration dogs (as during manual
reference position return) to be exected.1: P/S alarm No.090 to be issued.
NOTEWhen reference position return without dogs is specified,(when bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No.1002 is set to 1 or bit 1(DLZx) of parameter No.1005 is set to 1) the G28 commandspecified before a reference position is set causes P/Salarm No.090 to be issued, regardless of the setting of AZR.
IDG When the reference position is set without dogs, automatic setting of theIDGx parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1012) to prevent the referenceposition from being set again is:0 : Not performed.1 : Performed.
4.7PARAMETERS OFAXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
27
#7IPR
1004IPR
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ISC
ISC
#0
ISA
NOTE1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.2 For the Power Mate i–H, ISC is optional.
[Data type] Bit
ISA, ISC The least input increment and least command increment are set.
ISC ISA Least input increment and least commandincrement Symbol
0 0 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.0001 inch IS–B
0 1 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.001 inch IS–A
1 0 0.0001 mm, 0.0001 deg, or 0.00001 inch IS–C
IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value 10 times aslarge as the least command increment is specified, in increment systemsof IS–B or IS–C at setting mm.0: The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as larg as the
least command increment.1: The least input increment is set to a value 10 times as large as the least
command increment.
If IPR is set to 1, the least input increment is set as follows:
Input increment Least input increment
IS–B 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.0001 inch
IS–C 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.00001 inch
NOTEFor IS–A, the least input increment cannot be set to a value10 times as large as the least command increment.
#7RMBx1005
#6MCCx
#5 #4 #3HJZx
#2 #1DLZx
#0ZRNx
[Data type] Bit axis
ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued inautomatic operation (MEM, MDI, or DNC) and when a return to thereference position has not been performed since the power was turned on0 : An alarm is generated (P/S alarm 224).1 : An alarm is not generated.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
28
NOTEThe state in which the reference position has not beenestablished refers to that state in which reference positionreturn has not been performed after power–on when anabsolute position detector is not being used, or that state inwhich the association of the machine position with the positiondetected with the absolute position detector has not beencompleted (see the description of bit 4 (APZx) of parameterNo. 1815) when an absolute position detector is being used.
DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs0 : Disabled1 : Enabled
NOTEWhen DLZ of parameter No.1002 is 0, DLZx is enabled.When DLZ of parameter No.1002 is 1, DLZx is disabled, andthe function for setting the reference position without dogsis enabled for all axes.
HJZx When a reference position is already set:0 : Manual reference position return is performed with deceleration sogs.1 : Manual reference position return is performed using rapid traverse
without deceleration dogs, or manual reference position return isperformed with deceleration dogs, depending on the setting of bit 7(SJZ) of parameter No.0002.
NOTEWhen reference position return without dogs is specified,(when bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No.1002 is set to 1 or bit(DLZx) of parameter No.1005 is set to 1) reference positionreturn after a reference position is set is performed usingrapid traverse, regardless of the setting of HJZ.
MCCx When an axis become the removal state using the controlled axis removalsignal or setting:0: MCC is turned off1: MCC is not turned off. (Servo motor excitation is turned off, but the
MCC signal of the servo amplifier is not turned off.)
NOTEThis parameter is used to remove only one axis, for example,when a two–axis or three–axis amplifier is used. Whentwo–a axis or three–axis amplifier is used and only one axisis removed, servo alarm No.401 (V–READY OFF) is usuallyissued. However, this parameter, when set to 1, preventsservo alarm No.401 from being issued.Note, however, that disconnecting a servo amplifier from theCNC will cause the servo amplifier to enter the V–READYOFF status. This is a characteristic of all multiaxis amplifiers.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
29
RMBx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis (signal inputand setting input)0 : Invalid1 : Valid
#71006
#6 #5ZMIx
#4 #3 #2 #1ROSx
#0ROTx
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit axis
ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis.
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type.(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type
(Refer to parameter No.3624)
0 1 Rotation axis (A type)(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360�.
Absolute coordinate values are rounded or not roundedby parameter No.1008#0(ROAx) and #2(RRLx).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type.(Refer to parameter No.3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is donein the reference position return direction and the moveamount does not exceed one rotation.
1 0 Setting is invalid (unused)
1 1 Rotation axis (B type)(1) Inch/metric conversion, absolute coordinate values and
relative coordinate values are not done.(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values
and relative coordinate values are linear axis type. (Isnot rounded in 0 to 360�)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type. (Re-fer to parameter No.3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the ratation axis roll over function.
ZMIx The direction of reference position return.0 : Positive direction1 : Negative direction
NOTEThe direction of the initial backlash, which occurs whenpower is switched on, is opposite to the direction of areference position return.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
30
#71008
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2RRLx
#1RABx
#0ROAx
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit axis
ROAx The roll–over function of a rotation axis is0 : Invalid1 : Valid
NOTEROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for whichROTx, #0 of parameter No.1006, is set to 1)
RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter.1 : Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTERABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
RRLx Relative coordinates are0 : Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation1 : Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
NOTE1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No.1260.
#71009
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0ZEXx
[Data type] Bit axis
ZEXx 0 : Disables the reference position external setting function.1 : Enables the reference position external setting function.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
31
1010 Number of CNC–controlled axes
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., the number of controlled axes
Set the maximum number of axes that can be controlled by the CNC.
Suppose that the first axis is the X axis, and the second and subsequentaxes are the Y, Z, A, B, and C axes in that order, and that they arecontrolled as follows:
X, Y, Z, and A axes: Controlled by the CNC and PMCB and C axes: Controlled by the PMC
Then set this parameter to 4 (total 4: X, Y, Z, and A)
1011 Number of controlled axes
NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be turnedoff then back on to enable the setting.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 or 2 (Power Mate i–D)1 to 8 (Power Mate i–H)
Set the maximum number of axes including axes controlled by the PMC.If 0 or a value exceeding the specifiable range of valid data is specified,alarm 5150 is issued.Set 6 in an example of parameter No. 1010.
#71012
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0IDGx
[Data type] Bit axis
IDGx The function for setting the reference position again, without dogs, is:0 : Not inhibited.1 : Inhibited.
Examples
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
32
NOTE1 IDGx is enabled when the IDG parameter (bit 7 of parameter
No.1002) is 1.2 When the function for setting the reference position, without
dogs, is used, and the reference position is lost for somereason, an alarm requesting reference position return(No.300) is generated when the power is next turned on. Ifthe operator performs reference position return, as a resultof mistakenly identifying the alarm as that requesting theoperator to perform a normal reference position return, aninvalid reference position may be set. To prevent such anoperator error, the IDGx parameter is provided to prevent thereference position from being set again without dogs.(1) If the IDG parameter (bit 7 of parameter No.1002) is set
to 1, the IDGx parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1012)is automatically set to 1 when the reference position isset using the function for setting the reference positionwithout dogs. This prevents the reference position frombeing set again without dogs.
(2) Once the reference position is prevented from being setfor an axis again, without dogs, any attempt to set thereference position for the axis without dogs results in theoutput of an alarm (No.090).
(3) When the reference position must be set again withoutdogs, set IDGx to 0 before setting the reference position.
1020 Program axis name for each axis
[Data type] Byte axis
Set the program axis name for each controlled axis, using one of the valueslisted in the following table:
Axisname Setting Axis
name Setting Axisname Setting
X 88 U 85 A 65
Y 89 V 86 B 66
Z 90 W 87 C 67
NOTEThe same axis name cannot be assigned to more than oneaxis.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
33
1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, power must be turned off beforeoperation is continued.
[Data type] Byte axis
To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, etc.,each control axis is set to one of the basic three axes X, Y, and Z, or an axisparallel to the X, Y, or Z axis.G17: Plane Xp–YpG18: Plane Zp–XpG19: Plane Yp–ZpOnly one axis can be set for each of the three basic axes X, Y, and Z, buttwo or more parallel axes can be set.
Set value Meaning
0 Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Axis parallel to the X axis
6 Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 Axis parallel to the Z axis
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, power must be turned off beforeoperation is continued.
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., number of control axes
Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Usually set to same number as the control axis number.The control axis number is the order number that is used for setting theaxis–type parameters or axis–type machine signals
Refer to FSSB section of CONNECTION MANUAL (Function)B–63173EN–1.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
34
#71201
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ZPI
#0ZPR
[Data type] Bit
ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual referenceposition return is performed0 : Not set automatically1 : Set automatically
NOTEWhen parameter No. 1815 is set to use the absolute positiondetector (bit 5 of parameter No. 1815 = 1), be sure to set ZPRto 1.
ZPI Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate system is setautomatically0 : Value set in parameter No.1250 is used.1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter 1250 is used, or for input in
inches, the value set in parameter No.1251 is used.
#71203
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ZRC
#0
[Data type] Bit
ZRC This bit is used to switch the meaning of the reference position establishedsignals (ZRF1 to ZRF8).0 : As per the conventional specification
The reference position established signal becomes on when thereference position is established. It remains on until the referenceposition is lost.
1 : As per the new specificationThe reference position established signal becomes on when thereference position is established. It becomes off when the referenceposition is lost. It becomes off also when the reference position is losttemporarily (for example, during APC follow–up and when anAPC/SPC alarm condition exists).
4.8PARAMETERS OFCOORDINATES
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
35
NOTEThe new specification differs from the old specification in thecondition that turns the reference position establishedsignals (ZRF1 to ZRF8) on or off.� All bits become off during APC follow–up. (After the APC
follow–up ends, a bit that corresponds to the axis on whichthe reference position is established (the axis for which bit4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 is 1) becomes onautomatically.)
� If an APC/SPC alarm condition occurs, the bit for the axisthat corresponds to the alarm condition becomes off.However, alarm 307 or 308 (battery voltage drop 1 or 2)does not turn the bits off. After the bit becomes off becauseof an APC/SPC alarm condition, it becomes on again afterthe alarm condition is reset provided that bit 4 (APZ) ofparameter No. 1815 for the corresponding axis is 1.
� If you want to use a high–speed position switch, you shoulduse the new specification by setting this parameter to 1.
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine coordinate system
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, power must be turned off beforeoperation is continued.
1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position on each axis in the machinecoordinate system
1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position on each axis in the machine coor-dinate system
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data]Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
Set the coordinate values of the reference positions in the machinecoordinate system.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
36
1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate sys-tem setting is performed
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data]Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be usedfor setting a coordinate system automatically.
1251Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a coordi-nate system automatically when input is performed in inches
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data]Incerment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be usedfor setting a coordinate system automatically when input is performed ininches.
NOTEThis parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201 is set to1.
1260 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data]Increment system Unit of data Standard value
IS–A 0.01 deg 36000
IS–B 0.001 deg 360000
IS–C 0.0001 deg 3600000
[Valid data range] 1000 to 9999999
Set the amount of a shift per one rotaion of a rotaion axis.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
37
#7BFA1300
#6LZR
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
LZR Checking of stored stroke check during the time from power–on to themanual position reference return0: The stroke check is checked.1: The stroke check is not checked
NOTEWhen an absolute position detector is used and a referenceposition is already set upon power–up, stored stroke limitcheck 1 is started immediately after power–up, regardless ofthe setting.
BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke check is issued0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check is exceeded.1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check is exceeded.
NOTEThe tool stops at a point up to F/7500 mm short of or aheadof the boundary.(F: Feedrate when the tool reaches the boundary (mm/min))
1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check in the positive direction on each axis
1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check in the negative direction on each axis
[Data type] 2–word axis
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999The coordinate values of stored stroke check in the positive and negativedirections are setfor each axis in the machine coordinate system. Theoutside area of the two checks set in the parameters is inhibited.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(Xp,Yp,Zp)Set the machine coordinates of theboundaries in the positive direction(Xp, Yp, and Zp) using parameter No.1320, and those of the boundaries inthe negative direction (Xm, Ym, andZm) using parameter No. 1321. Theprohibited area thus becomes thehatched area in the figure on the left.
(Xm,Ym,Zm)
4.9PARAMETERS OFSTROKE CHECK
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
38
NOTEAvoid specifying the relationships in value between thecoordinates of boundaries in the positive and those in thenegative direction in reverse, that is, setting:
Parameter No. 1320 < parameter No. 1321With this setting, it is assumed that the stroke is infinite, andstored–stroke check 1 is not made. In addition, a coordinatevalue can overflow, resulting in the current position not beingdisplayed correctly or an absolute command failing to movethe tool to the correct position.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
39
#7
1401
#6RDR
RDR
#5TDR
#4RF0
RF0
#3 #2 #1LRP
LRP
#0RPD
RPD
[Data type] Bit
RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power–on time to thecompletion of the reference position return.0: Disabled (Jog feed is performed.)1: Enabled
LRP Positioning (G00)0: Positioning is performed with non–linear type positioning so that the
tool moves along each axis independently at rapid traverse.1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool
moves in a straight line.
RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,0: The machine tool does not stop moving.1: The machine tool stops moving.
TDR Dry run during tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid tapping)0: Enabled1: Disabled
RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command0: Disabled1: Enabled
#71404
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2F8A
#1DLF
#0
[Data type] Bit
DLF After a reference potition is set, manual reference position returnperformed at:0 : Rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1420)1 : Manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1424)
NOTEThis parameter selects a feedrate for reference positionreturn performed without dogs. This parameter also selectsa feedrate when manual reference position return isperformed according to bit 7 (SJZ) of parameter No.0002using rapid traverse without deceleration dogs after areference position is set.
F8A Valid data range for an F command with a decimal point in feed–perminute mode
Increment system Units IS–A, IS–B IS–C
Millimeter input mm/min 0.001 to 99999.999.
Inch input inch/min 0.00001 to 999.99999.
Rotation axis (mm) deg/min 1 to 240000. 1 to 100000.
Rotation axis (inch) deg/min 1 to 9600. 1 to 4000.
4.10PARAMETERS OFFEEDRATE
0:
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
40
Increment system Units IS–A, IS–B IS–C
Millimeter input mm/min 0.001 to 240000. 0.001 to 100000.
Inch input inch/min 0.00001 to 9600. 0.00001 to 4000.
Rotation axis deg/min 1 to 240000. 1 to 100000.
#7FDC1405
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
FDC The feedrate switching function (optional) is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
1410 Dry run rate
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Set the dry run rate when the manual feedrate is overridden by 100%.
1411 Cutting feedrate in the automatic mode at power–on
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� ���� ���� ���� �����
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 32767
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 32767
When the machine requires little change in cutting feedrate duringcutting, a cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter. Thiseliminates the need to specify a cutting feedrate in the NC program.The cutting feedrate set by this parameter is valid after the CNC is placedin the clear state by power–up or a reset until a feedrate is specified by aprogram command (F command). After a feedrate is specified by the Fcommand, the feedrate becomes valid.
1:
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
41
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis
[Data type] 2–word axis[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 6 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 6 to 100000
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% foreach axis.
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis
[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 6000 30 to 4800
Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000
Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
��$�� ���%���� �%������ �����&%������ %�'�
�&�� �&�(&%������ %�'�
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 F0
F0: Parameter 1421
1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes
[Data type] 2–word[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate.A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that itdoes not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter.
NOTE1 To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use
parameter No.1430 instead.2 This parameter is unusable in the high–speed response
mode. Be sure to set a value in parameter No. 1430.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
42
1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
Specify a jog feedrate at feed per minute with an override of 100%.
[Unit of data, valid range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis
[Data type] 2–word axis[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to �� 30 to �
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min � �� �� � � �� ��
Rotation axis 1 deg/min � �� �� � �� �
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is100% for each axis.
NOTEIf 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
1425 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position returnis performed for each axis.
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
[Data type] 2–word axis
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000
Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.A feedrate for each axis is clamped in cutting feed so that it does notexceed the maximum feedrate specified for each axis.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
43
NOTE1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular
interpolation. In polar coordinate, the maximum feedrate forall axes specified in parameter No.1422 is effective.
2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedratespecified in parameter No.1422 is applied to all axes and thefeedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate.
1431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advanced preview control mode
[Data type] 2 Word
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to �� 0 to �
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min �� �� � �� ��
Rotation axis 1 deg/min �� �� �� �
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the advancedpreview control mode.A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that itdoes not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter.
CAUTIONIf the current mode is not the advanced preview feed forwardmode, the actual feedrate is clamped at the maximumcutting feedrate specified in parameter No. 1422 or 1430.
NOTETo specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, useparameter No.1432 instead.
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advanced preview feed forward mode
[Data type] 2 Word axis
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to �� 0 to �
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min �� �� � �� ��
Rotation axis 1 deg/min �� �� �� �
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advancedpreview feed forward mode.In cutting feed, the actual feedrate for an axis is clamped at such amaximum feedrate that the maximum cutting feedrate for the axis will notbe exceeded.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
44
CAUTIONIf the current mode is not the advanced preview feed forwardmode, the actual feedrate is clamped at the maximumcutting feedrate specified in parameter No. 1422 or 1430.
NOTE1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular
interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involuteinterpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified inparameter No.1431 is effective.
2 If a setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate specifiedin parameter No.1431 is applied to all axes and the feedrateis clamped at the maximum feedrate.
1480 Lower feedrate limit for the rate feed function
[Data type] 2 Word
[Unit of data] 0.001 mm/min (for mm input)0.00001 inch/min (for inch input)
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999The actual speed is clamped at this value during rate feed if it is anticipatedthat it may become lower. If the specified value is 0, 1000 is assumed.
1481 Feedrate for the feedrate switching signal EXF1
1482 Feedrate for the feedrate switching signal EXF2
1483 Feedrate for the feedrate switching signal EXF3
1484 Feedrate for the feedrate switching signal EXF4
1485 Feedrate for the feedrate switching signal EXF5
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter (input) 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine (input) 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Specify a feedrate for each of the feedrate switching signals EXF1 toEXF5.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
45
#71601
#6 #5NCI
#4RTO
#3 #2OVB
#1 #0
[Data type] Bit
OVB Block overlap in cutting feed0 : Blocks are not overlapped in cutting feed.1 : Blocks are overlapped in cutting feed.
Block overlap outputs the pulses remaining at the end of pulsedistribution in a block together with distribution pulses in the next block.This eliminates changes in feedrates between blocks.
Block overlap is enabled when blocks containing G01, G02, or G03 areconsecutively specified in G64 mode. If minute blocks, however, arespecified consecutively, overlap may not be performed.
The following pulses in block F2 are added to the pulses remaining at theend of pulse distribution in block F1.
(Number of pulses to be added) = F2 �(Number of pulses required at the end of block F1)
F1
When F1 = F2
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
F F1 F2
t
When block overlap is disabled
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
F F1 F2
t
ÉÉÉÉ
When block overlap is enabled
RTO Block overlap in rapid traverse0 : Blocks are not overlapped in rapid traverse.1 : Blocks are overlapped in rapid traverse.
NOTESee the description of parameter No.1722.
NCI Inposition check at deceleration0 : Performed1 : Not performed
4.11PARAMETERS OFACCELERATION/DECELERATIONCONTROL
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
46
#71602
#6LS2
#5G8S
#4 #3BS2
#2 #1 #0FWB
[Data type] Bit
FWB Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before interpolation0 : Type A of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.1 : Type B of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used.
Type A: When a feedrate is to be changed by a command,acceleration/deceleration starts after the program enters theblock in which the command is specified.
Type B: When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, decelerationstarts and terminates at the block before the blcock in which thecommand is specified.When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, accelerationstarts after the program enters theblock in which the commandis specified.
F1
F2
F3
Feedrate
TimeN1 N2
F1
F2
F3
Feedrate
TimeN1 N2
Type A
Specified feedrateFeedrate after acceleration/deceleration before inter-polation is applied
Specified feedrateFeedrate after acceleration/deceleration before inter-polation is applied
Point 1
<Example of a deceleration process> <Example of a acceleration process>
Type B
To change the feedrate from F3 to F2, it is necessary to start reducing the feedrate at point 1.
BS2,LS2 The following table lists the acceleration/deceleration values afterinterpolation is applied, for cutting feed in the advanced preview feedforward mode.
BS2 LS2 Acceleration/deceleration0 0 Exponential accelaration/deceleration after interpolation
0 1 Linear accelaration/deceleration after interpolation
1 0 Bell–shaped accelaration/deceleration after interpolation
G8S The advanced preview control for the serial spindle is0 : Not effective.
(It is not possible to use the advanced control for the rigid tapping. It isnecessary to cancel the advanced mode before rigid tapping isexecuted)
1 : Effective.(It is possible to use the advanced control for the rigid tapping.)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
47
NOTEFAD(Fine acceleration/deceleration) cannot be applied forspindle axes. When the advanced control is applied for serialspindle, it is necessary to cancel the FAD(Fineacceleration/deceleration) for servo axis.
#71605
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1TCE
#0
[Data type] Bit
TCE The time constant expansion function is:0 : Not used (The maximum time constant becomes 8000.)1 : Used (The maximum time constant varies depending on how many
controlled axes are used.)
If the time constant expansion function is used, the range of values thatcan be set in the parameter–specified cutting feed linear (bell–shaped)acceleration/deceleration time constant (parameter No. 1622 for thenormal mode, parameter Nos. 1635 and 1638 for the high–speed responsemode) and JOG feed linear (bell–shaped) acceleration/deceleration timeconstant (parameter No. 1624) varies depending on how many controlledaxes are used, as follows:
(a) Normal mode
Number of controlled axes Vaild data range
1 to 2 0 to 32000
3 to 4 0 to 16000
5 to 8 0 to 8000
(b) High–speed responce mode (Power Mate i–H only)
Number of controlled axes Vaild data range
1 to 2 0 to 4000
3 to 4 0 to 2000
5 to 8 0 to 1000
NOTEThe change to this setting takes effect next time the poweris turned on.
#71610
#6 #5 #4JGLx
#3 #2 #1CTBx
#0CTLx
[Data type] Bit axis
CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
NOTETo use bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration afterinterpolation, set this parameter to 0 and select theacceleration/deceleration using CTBx, bit 1 of parameterNo.1610.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
48
ParameterAcceleration/deceleration
CTBx CTLxAcceleration/deceleration
0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration
0 1 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1 0 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/decel-
eration after interpolation is applied (depending on the setting inCTLx, bit 0 of parameter No.1610).
1 : Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
JGLx Acceleration/deceleration in jog feed0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied (depending onwhich is used for cutting feed).
1620 Time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped accelera-tion/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Specify a time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in rapid tra-verse.
(1) When the function is provided, set this parameter to time constantT1 used in bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse,and set parameter No.1621 to time constant T2.
(2) When the function is provided, specify a time constant used inlinear acceleration/deceleration and set parameter No.1621 to 0.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
49
<Rapid traverese linear acceleration/deceleration>Speed
Rapid traverse feed rate
Time T: Time constant for linearacceleration/deceleration
� �
������ �������� ���� � ���� �!!��������"���!��������"#
�����
�����
�������� ����
TIme
T2/2
T2
T1 T2/2
T1: Set a time constant used for lin-ear acceleration/deceleration
T2: Set a time for rounding.
Total time=T1 + T2Time for linear=T1 – T2Time for rounding part=T2
Set the value when the rapid traverse rate is 100%. If it is under 100%, thetotal time is reduced. (Constant acceleration method)The value of T1 is determined from the torque of motor. Usually set thevalue of T2 to 24 ms or 32 ms.
1621 Time constant t T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid tra-verse for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
Specify time constant T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/decelerationin rapid traverse for each axis.
NOTE1 Set parameter No.1620 to time constant T1 used for
bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, andset this parameter to time constant T2.For details of time constants T1 and T2, see the descriptionof parameter No.1620.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration is applied in rapid traverse. The setting inparameter No.1620 is used as a time constant in linearacceleration/deceleration.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
50
1622 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] For exponential acceleration/deceleration0 to 4000
For linear or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feedinterpolation is applied
� When the time constant expansion function is not to be used (bit 1 ofparameter 1605 = 0)0 to 8192
� When the time constant expansion function is to be used (bit 1 of param-eter 1605 = 1)
Number of controlled axes Vaild data range
1 to 2 0 to 32000
3 to 4 0 to 16000
5 to 8 0 to 8000
Specify the cutting feedrate acceleration/deceleration time constant foreach axis.
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration incutting feed, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation orlinear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for eachaxis. Use parameters CTLx and CTBx (bits 0 and 1 of parameter No.1610) to specify what type to use. Except for special applications, thesame time constant must be set for all axes in this parameter. If the timeconstants set for the axes differ from each other, proper straight lines andarcs cannot be obtained.
Speed
T
Time
T : Total time. it is constant irrespective of feed rate. (Time constant is constant).
The curve corresponds to that T1 = T/2 and T2 = T/2 set in pa-rameter No.1620 and 1621.
Bell–shaped acceleraton/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
51
1623 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0,6 to 15000 0,6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0,6 to 6000 0,6 to 4800
Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 0,6 to 15000 0,6 to 12000
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration incutting feed for each axis.
NOTEExcept for special applications, this parameter must be setto 0 for all axes. If a value other than 0 is specified, properstraight lines and arcs cannot be obtained.
1624 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] For exponential acceleration/deceleration0 to 4000
For linear or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feedinterpolation is applied
� When the time constant expansion function is not to be used (bit 1 ofparameter 1605 = 0)0 to 8192
� When the time constant expansion function is to be used (bit 1 of param-eter 1605 = 1)
Number of controlled axes Vaild data range
1 to 2 0 to 32000
3 to 4 0 to 16000
5 to 8 0 to 8000
Specify the jog feed acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis.
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration,bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/decelerationafter interpolation in jog feed fot each axis. Use parameters CTLx, CTBx,and JGLx (bits 0, 1 and 4 of parameter No. 1610) to specify what type touse.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
52
1625 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration incutting feed for each axis.
1630Parameter 1 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration be-fore interpolation (maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/de-celeration before interpolation)
[Data type] 2–word
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. In this parameter, set a maximummachining speed during linear acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation. In parameter No.1631, set a time used to reach the maximummachining speed.
Speed
Parameter 1
Parameter 2Time
Parameter 1: Parameter No.1630Parameter 2: Parameter No.1631
NOTEWhen 0 is set in parameter No.1630 or parameter No.1631,linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation isdisabled.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
53
1631Parameter 2 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration be-fore interpolation (time used to reach the maximum machining speed duringlinear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.)
[Data type] Word[Unit of data] 1 ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. In this parameter, set the time (timeconstant) used to reach the speed set in parameter No.1630.
NOTE1 When 0 is set in parameter No.1630 or parameter No.1631,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation isdisabled.
2 In parameter Nos. 1630 and 1631, set values that satisfy thefollowing:Parameter No.1630/Parameter No.1631�5
1635 Time constant T for linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpola-tion is applied for each axis or time constant T1 for bell–shaped acceleration/de-celeration after cutting feed interpolation is applied in the high–speed responsemode for each axis
[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] If bit 1 (TCE) of parameter No. 1605 = 00 to 1000
If bit 1 (TCE) of parameter No. 1605 = 10 to 1000 (Number of controlled axes : 5 to 8 axes)0 to 2000 (Number of controlled axes : 3 to 4 axes)0 to 4000 (Number of controlled axes : 1 to 2 axes)
This parameter is used to set time constant T for linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is applied or time constant T1for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolationis applied in the high–speed response mode for each axis.
1636 Time constant T for rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration or timeconstant T1 for rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in the high–speed response mode for each axis
[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
This parameter is used to set time constant T for rapid traverse linearacceleration/deceleration or time constant T1 for rapid traversebell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in the high–speed response modefor each axis.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
54
1637 Time constant T2 for rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in thehigh–speed response mode for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
This parameter is used to set time constant T2 for rapid traversebell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in the high–speed response modefor each axis.
NOTEIf this parameter is 0, the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration is linear. The time constant for the linearacceleration/deceleration is the one specified in parameterNo.1636.
1638 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feedinterpolation is applied in the high–speed response mode for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
This parameter is used to set time constant T2 for bell–shapedacceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is applied in thehigh–speed response mode for each axis.
1642 Bell–shaped acc/dec time constant for high speed response function T2 (For G135.3)
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
55
����
$
Feedrate
Time
$–T���������
NOTE1 The acceleration time specified by this parameter is fixed
regardless feedrate command. Then, the time of a curvedline part in above figure is usually constant regardlessfeedrate.
2 The time constant specified by this parameter is used at bothaccelerating and decelerating.
1644 Time constant for continuous feed acceleration/deceleration in the high–speedresponse mode for each axis or time constant T1 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after continuous feed interpolation is applied in the high–speedresponse mode for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] If bit 1 (TCE) of parameter No. 1605 = 00 to 1000If bit 1 (TCE) of parameter No. 1605 = 10 to 1000 (Number of control axes: 5 to 8)0 to 2000 (Number of control axes: 3 to 4)0 to 4000 (Number of control axes: 1 to 2)
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 3 (HECF) of parameter No.8680 is 1.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
56
1645 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after continuousfeed interpolation is applied in the high–speed response mode for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 3 (HECF) of parameter No.8680 is 1.
NOTE1 When parameter No. 1638 (time constant T2 for bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation isapplied in the high–speed response mode for each axis) is0, the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration in thehigh–speed response mode is linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.Similarly, when parameter No. 1645 (time constant T2 forbell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after continuousfeed interpolation is applied in the high–speed responsemode for each axis) is 0, the continuous feed acceleration/deceleration in the high–speed response mode is linearacceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
2 When bit 1 (TCE) of parameter No. 1605 is 0, the sum of timeconstants T1 and T2 is 1000 ms or less.When bit 1 (TCE) of parameter No. 1605 is 1, the sum of timeconstants T1 and T2 is as follows.
0 to 1000 (Number of control axes: 5 to 8)0 to 2000 (Number of control axes: 3 to 4)0 to 4000 (Number of control axes: 1 to 2)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
57
1722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks
[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 1 to 100
This parameter is used when rapid traverse blocks are arrangedsuccessively, or when a rapid traverse block is followed by a block thatdoes not cause, movement. When the feedrate for each axis of a block isreduced to the ratio set in this parameter, the execution of the next block isstarted.
Fh
Fd
X–axis feedrate
N1 G00 X– – ; N2 G00 X– – ;
When the function of overlapping rapidtraverse blocks is enabled
When the function of overlapping rapidtraverse blocks is disabled
Fh�
Fd
: Rapid traverse feedrate: Setting of parameter No.1722 (feedrate reduction ratio): Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: Fh x �����
t
NOTEThe parameter No.1722 is effective when parameterNo.1601 #4 (RT0) is set to 1.
1762Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed in the advanced preview feed forward mode
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] 1 ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
This parameter is used to set a time constant for cutting feed exponentialacceleration/deceleration in the advanced preview feed forward mode foreach axis.
Examples
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
58
1763Minimumspeed in exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed in theadvanced preview feed forward mode
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
This parameter is used to set the minimum speed (FL) for cutting feedexponential acceleration/deceleration in the advanced preview feedforward mode for each axis.
1768Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed in advancedpreview feed forward mode
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 8 to 512
This parameter sets a time constant for linear acceleration/decelerationforcutting feed in the advanced preview feed forward mode.
1770Parameter1 (for advanced preview feed forward) for setting an acceleration forlinear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (maximum machining speedduring linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Data type] 2 Word
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linearacceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the advanced previewfeed forward mode. In this parameter, set the maximum machining speedduring linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Set the timeused to reach the maximum machining speed in parameter No.1771.
Speed
Parameter 1(No.1770)
Parameter 2 (No.1771)
Time
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
59
CAUTIONWhen 0 is set in parameter No.1770 or parameter No.1771,linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation isdisabled.
1771Parameter 2 (for advanced preview feed forward) for setting an acceleration forlinear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (maximum machining speedduring linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 1 ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the advanced preview feed forwardmode. In this parameter, set the time (time constant) used toreach thespeed set in parameter No.1770.
CAUTION1 When 0 is set in parameter No.1770 or parameter No.1771,
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation isdisabled.
2 In parameter Nos.1770 and 1771, set values that satisfy thefollowing:Parameter No.1770/Parameter No.1771�5
1784 Feedrate at overtravel alarm occurrence during linear acceleration/decelerationbefore interpolation
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
��������� ������ ���� �� �������� ���� �����
��������� ������ ���� �� ����� !�" � !# � !�
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Deceleration is performed beforehand so that the feedrate set in theparameter is set when an overtravel alarm is issued (when the limit isreached) during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.With this parameter, the amount of overrun can be reduced when anovertravel alarm is issued.
CAUTIONThe control mentioned above is effective only for storedstroke check 1.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
60
NOTE1 When 0 is set, the control described above is not applied.2 Select linear acceleration/deceleration type B before
interpolation (by setting bit 0 (FWB) of parameter No. 1602to 1).
NOTE1 If a block containing no move command is specified during
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, a gradualstop occurs in the previous block.
2 If a one–shot G code is specified during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, a gradual stop occurs inthe previous block.
3 If an M/S/T code is specified in a block containing a movecommand during acceleration/deceleration beforeinterpolation, a gradual stop occurs in the block.
4 Even during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,acceleration/deceleration is not performed in a G31 (skipfunction) block.
5 Even during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation,acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is effective. Toperform acceleration/deceleration only before interpolation,set the time constant of acceleration/deceleration afterinterpolation to 0.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
61
#71800
#6 #5 #4 #3FFR
#2OZR
#1CVR
#0
[Data type] Bit
CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before positioncontrol ready signal PRDY comes ON0: A servo alarm is generated.1: A servo alarm is not generated.
OZR When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt stateduring automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of theconditions listed below:0: Manual reference position return is not performed, with P/S alarm
No.091.1: Manual reference position return is performed without an alarm
occurring.
< Conditions >
(1) When there is a remaining distance to travel.
(2) When an auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle–speedfunction, tool function) is being executed.
(3) When a cycle such as a dwell cycle or canned cycle is being executed.
FFR Feed–forward control is enabled for0 : Cutting feed only1 : Cutting feed and rapid traverse
#71801
#6 #5CIN
#4CCI
#3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
CCI The in–position area for cutting feed is:0 : Set in parameter No.1826 (same as for rapid traverse).1 : Set in bit 5 (CIN) of parameter No.1801.
CIN When bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No.1801 = 1, the in–position area forcutting feed is:0 : Use value in parameter No.1827 if the next block is also for cutting
feed, or use value in parameter No.1826 if the next block is not forcutting feed.
1 : Use value in parameter No.1827, regardless of the next block. (Thesetting of parameter No.1826 is used for rapid traverse, and the settingof parameter No.1827 is used for cutting feed.)
4.12PARAMETERS OF SERVO
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
62
#71802
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1DC4
#0
NOTEAfter this parameter is set, the power needs to be turned off.
[Data type] Bit
DC4 When the reference position is established on the linear scale withreference marks:0 : An absolute position is established by detecting three reference marks.1 : An absolute position is established by detecting four reference marks.
#71803
#6 #5 #4TQF
#3EEP
#2NVY
#1TQA
#0TQI
TQF NVY TQA TQI
[Data type] Bit
TQI While torque restriction is applied, in–position check is:0 : Not performed.1 : Performed.
TQA While torque restriction is applied, checking for an excessive error in thestopped state/during movement is:0 : Not performed.1 : Performed.
NVY 0 : The servo alarm (SV401) is issued when VRDY is off.1 : Even when VRDY is off, the servo alarm is not issued, but the system
waits until VRDY is set to on. Set NVY to 1 when one amplifier is tobe shared by multiple CNCs.
EEP When two single–axis amplifiers are used, an emergency stop is:0 : Not performed for each path separately.1 : Performed for each path separately.
NOTETo use two–path control, set also the NWR parameter (bit 7of parameter No. 8100) to 1.
TQF When torque control is performed by an axis control command of thePMC axis control function, follow–up operation is:0 : Not performed.1 : Performed.
#71804
#6SAK
#5ANA
#4IVO
#3 #2 #1 #0BLA
[Data type] Bit axis
BLA An APC battery voltage decrease is :0 : Watched only at the time of the communication with Pulsecoder.1 : Always watched.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
63
IVO When an attempt is made to release an emergency stop while the VRDYOFF alarm ignore signal is 1:0 : The emergency stop state is not released until the VRDY OFF alarm
ignore signal is set to 0.1 : The emergency stop state is released.
NOTEWhen a reset is issued while the VRDY OFF alarm ignoresignal is set to 1 and the motor activating current is low, thereset state can also be released, provided this parameter isset to 1.
ANA When an abnormal load is detected for an axis:0 : Movement along all axes is stopped, and a servo alarm is output.1 : No servo alarm is output, and movement along only the axes of the
group containing the axis with the abnormal load is stopped in interlockmode. (The group number of each axis is set in parameter No.1881.)
SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGNVRY is 1, or when theVRDY OFF alarm ignore signals IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 are 1:0 : Servo ready signal SA is set to 0.1 : Servo ready signal SA remains set to 1.
#71806
#6 #5APCD
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit
APCD Machine coordinates read in the PMC window or FOCAS1 window andcoordinates used during output of the PMC positional signal are:0 : The same as before.1 : Values by the actual position load function of the absolute position
detector.
NOTE1 When at least one of these parameters is set, the power
must be turned off before operation is continued.2 When this parameter is set to 1, bit 4 (SPDO) of parameter
No. 2224 also needs to be set to 1.
#71807
#6 #5 #4 #3RSPE
#2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
RSPE The axis stop signal input for quick stop is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
NOTEWhen bit 3 (RSPE) of this parameter (No. 1807) is set to 1,bit 5 (ANA) of parameter No. 1804 also needs to be set to 1.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
64
#71815
#6 #5APCx
#4APZx
#3 #2DCLx
#1OPTx
#0
NOTEWhen this parameter has been set, the power must beturned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit axis
OPTx Position detector0 : A separate pulse coder is not used.1 : A separate pulse coder is used.
DCLx As a separate position detector, the linear scale with reference marks is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
NOTEWhen using the linear scale with reference marks, also setthe OPTx parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.1815) to 1.
APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when theabsolute position detector is used0 : Not corresponding1 : Corresponding
NOTEWhen an absolute position detector is used, after primaryadjustment is performed or after the absolute positiondetector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, powermust be turned off and on, then manual reference positionreturn must be performed. This completes the positionalcorrespondence between the machine position and theposition on the absolute position detector, and sets thisparameter to 1 automatically.
APCx Position detector0 : Other than absolute position detector1 : Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
65
#71816
#6DM3x
#5DM2x
#4DM1x
#3 #2 #1 #0
NOTEWhen this parameter has been set, the power must beturned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit axis
DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiplier
Set valueDetection multiplier
DM3x DM2x DM1xDetection multiplier
00001111
00110011
01010101
1/21
3/22
5/23
7/24
NOTEWhen the flexble feed gear is used, do not use theseparameters. Set the numerator and denominator of DMR toan appropriate values in parameters 2084 and 2085respectively.
#71817
#6TAN
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTEWhen this parameter has been set, the power must beturned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit axis
TAN Tandem control0 : Not used1 : Used
NOTESet this parameter to both master axis and slave axis.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
66
#71819
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1CRFx
#0FUPx
[Data type] Bit axis
FUPx To perform follow–up when the servo is off is set for each axis.0: The follow–up signal, *FLWU, determines whether follow–up is
performed or not.When *FLWU is 0, follow–up is performed.When *FLWU is 1, follow–up is not performed.
1: Follow–up is not performed.
CRFx When servo alarm No.445 (software disconnection), No.446 (hardwaredisconnection), No.447 (hardware disconnection (separate type)), orNo.421 (excessive dual position feedback error) is issued:0 : The reference position setting remains as is.1 : The system enters the reference position undefined state.
1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)
NOTEWhen this parameter has been set, the power must beturned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte axis
Set a command multiplier indicating the ratio of the least commandincrement to the detection unit for each axis.
Least command increment = detection unit � command multiplierRelationship between the increment system and the least commandincrement
Increment system
Least input increment and least command incrementIncrement system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and thecapacity of the reference counter
least commandincrement
X CMR Error counter
X DMRReferencecounter
DAConverter
Position detector
To velocity control
Feedback pulse
Detectionunit
+
–
Fig.4.12 CMR, DMR, and the Capacity of the Reference Counter
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
67
Set the magnification ratios of CMR and DMR so that the weight ofpositive inputs to the error counter equals that of negative inputs.
feedback pulse unitLeast command incrementCMR
=detection unit=DMR
The feedback pulse unit varies according to the type of detector.
Feedback pulse unit = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coderthe number of pulses per rotation of the pulse coder (2000, 2500, or 3000)
As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for thereference position return in the grid method.
Size of the reference counter = Grid interval/detection unitGrid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coderThe value set in the parameter is obtained as follows:
(1) When command multiplier is 1/2 to 1/27
Set value = 1(Command multiplier)
+ 100
Valid data range: 102 to 127
(2) When command multiply is 1 to 48Set value = 2 command multiplierValid data range: 2 to 96
NOTEWhen command multiplier is 1 to 48, the set value must bedetermined so that an integer can be set for commandmultiplier.
1821 Reference counter size for each axis
NOTEWhen this parameter has been set, the power must beturned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set the size of the reference counter.
When using the linear scale with reference marks, set the space betweenthe mark–1 indications.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
68
1825 Servo loop gain for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] 0.01 s –1
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
Set the loop gain for position control for each axis.
When the machine performs linear and circular interpolation (cutting), thesame value must be set for all axes. When the machine requirespositioning only, the values set for the axes may differ from one another.As the loop gain increases, the response by position control is improved.A too large loop gain, however, makes the servo system unstable.
The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of pulsescounted by the error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as follows:
feedrate�
Positioning deviation =60 (loop gain)
Unit : Positioning deviation mm, inches, or degFeedrate : mm/min, inches/min, or deg/minloop gain: s–1
1826 In–position width for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
The in–position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position(the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than thein–position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specifiedposition. (The machine is in the in–position state.)
1827 In–position width in cutting feed for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set an in–position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter isvalid when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No.1801=1.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
69
1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit duringmovement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stoppedimmediately (as in emergency stop).Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus somemargin in this parameter.
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioningdeviation limit set for stopped state, a servo alarm is generated, andoperation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
1830 Axis–by–axis positional deviation limit at servo–off time
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit at servo–off time,on an axis–by–axis basis.If the value specified with this parameter is exceeded at servo–off time, aservo alarm (No.410) is issued to cause an immediate stop (same as anemergency stop). Usually, set the same value as a positional deviation atstop time (parameter No.1829).
NOTEWhen this parameter is set to 0, no positional deviation limitcheck is made at servo–off time.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
70
1832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set the feed stop positioning deviation for each axis.If the positioning deviation exceeds the feed stop positioning deviationduring movement, pulse distribution and acceleration/decelerationcontrol are stopped temporarily. When the positioning deviation drops tothe feed stop positioning deviation or below, pulse distribution andacceleration/deceleration control are resumed.The feed stop function is used to reduce overshoot in acceleration/deceleration mainly by large servo motors.Generally, set the middle value between the positioning deviation limitduring movement and the positioning deviation at rapid traverse as thefeed stop positioning deviation.
1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible
[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position returnin manual reference position return.
In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as thedefault.)
NOTEWhen bit 0 (PLC01) of parameter No.2000 is set to 1, a valueten times greater than the value set in this parameter is usedto make the check.[Example]
When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit 0(PLC01) of parameter No.2000 is set to 1, reference
1850 Grid shift for each axis
NOTEWhen this parameter has been set, the power must beturned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
Within the reference counter size (No. 1821)
Set a grid shift for each axis to shift the reference position. The grid shiftthat can be set is within half the reference counter size.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
71
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit[Valid data range] –9999 to +9999
Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When the machine moves in a direction opposite to the reference positionreturn direction after the power is turned on, the first backlashcompensation is performed.
1855 Current limit override value for each axis
[Data type] Byte axis[Valid data range] 0 to 255
This parameter specifies a current limit override value for each axis.
Override value = Setting*100/255(%).
NOTEWhen 0 is specified, torque control based on this parameteris not exercised. (A DI signal and PMC–set torque valuebecome valid.)
1872 Servo positional deviation check value
[Data type] 2-word axis[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter specifies a servo positional deviation check value. Whenthis value is exceeded, signals SVER1 to SVER8 are turned on.
1880 Abnormal load detection alarm timer
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767 (200 msec is assumed when 0 is set)
This parameter sets the time from the detection of an abnormal load until aservo alarm is issued. The specified value is rounded up to the nearestintegral multiple of 8 msec.
[Example] When 30 is specified, the value is rounded up to 32 (msec).
1881 Group number when an abnormal load is detected
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
This parameter sets the group number of each axis, used when anabnormal load is detected.
If an abnormal load is detected for an axis, only the movement along theaxes of the group containing the axis with the abnormal load is stopped. If0 is set for an axis, movement along that axis is stopped whenever anabnormal load is detected for any axis.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
72
Example: Assume that the following settings have been made. If anabnormal load is detected for the sixth axis, movement alongthe second, fourth, sixth, and seventh axes is stopped. If anabnormal load is detected for the fourth axis, movement alongthe fourth and seventh axes is stopped.
Parameter No.1881 Setting(First axis) 1
(Second axis) 2(Third axis) 1
(Fourth axis) 0(Fifth axis) 3(Sixth axis) 2
(Seventh axis) 0
NOTEThis parameter is enabled when the ANA parameter (bit 5 ofparameter No.1804) is 1.
1882 Space between the mark–2 indications on the linear scale with reference marks
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the space between the mark–2 indications on thelinear scale with reference marks.
1883Distance from the zero point of the linear scale with reference marks to the ref-erence position
NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be turnedoff then back on for the setting to become effective.
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
This parameter sets the distance from the zero point of the linear scale withreference marks to the reference position. The zero point of the scale is thatpoint where mark 1 and mark 2 match. Generally, this point is a virtual pointthat does not actually exist on the scale. (See the figure below.)
When the reference position is located in the positive direction as viewedfrom the zero point of the scale, set a positive value for this parameter.When the reference position is located in the negative direction as viewedfrom the zero point, set a negative value.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
73
41.88.242.0
Parameter No.1821
Reference position
Scale
Scale endZero point of
the scale
Parameter No.1883
Parameter No.1882
8.0
Mark 2Mark 1 = mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2Mark 1
1885 Maximum allowable value for total travel during torque control
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the maximum allowable value for the total travel(error counter value) for an axis placed under torque control, as specifiedby the axis control command of the PMC axis control function. If the totaltravel exceeds the parameter–set value while torque control is applied, aservo alarm (No.423) is generated.
NOTEThis parameter is enabled when the TQF parameter (bit 4 ofparameter No.1803) is 0 (follow–up is not performed duringtorque control).
1886 Positional deviation when torque control is canceled
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the positional deviation used when torque control,performed for an axis according to the axis control command of the PMCaxis control function, is canceled and position control is resumed. Afterthe positional deviation has fallen to the parameter–set value, switching toposition control is performed.
NOTEThis parameter is enabled when the TQF parameter (bit 4 ofparameter No.1803) is 0 (follow–up is not performed duringtorque control).
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
74
#7HFU1901
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
HFU Follow–up on occurrence of an emergency stop or servo alarm in thetorque control mode and follow–up after release of servo alarm afterpower–on during use of the absolute position detector are:0 : The same as before.1 : Changed to a high–speed type.
#71902
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ASE
#0FMD
NOTE1 After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned
off then back on for the setting to become effective.2 Refer to “Connection Manual (Function) B–63173EN–1” for
detailed explanations about how to set up the FSSB.
[Data type] Bit
FMD The FSSB setting mode is:0 : Automatic setting mode.
(When information including an axis–amplifier relationship is set onthe FSSB setting screen, parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through1919, 1936, and 1937 are set automatically.)
1 : Manual setting 2 mode.(Set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937manually.)
ASE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMDparameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 0), automatic setting is:0 : Not completed.1 : Completed.
(This bit is automatically set to 1 upon the completion of automaticsetting.)
#71904
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0DSP
NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be turnedoff then back on for the setting to become effective.
[Data type] Bit axis
DSP0 : Two axes use one DSP. (Ordinary axes)1 : One axis uses one DSP.
NOTEParameter No.1904 is set on the FSSB setting screen. So,parameter No.1904 should not have to be specified directly.This parameter need not be set in FSSB manual setting 2mode.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
75
#7PM21905
#6PM1
#5IO2
#4IO1
#3 #2 #1 #0FSL
NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be turnedoff then back on for the setting to become effective.
[Data type] Bit axis
FSL The type of interface used between the servo amplifier and servo software is:0 : Fast type.1 : Slow type.
The user can choose between two interface types for servo data transfer:fast type or slow type. Set this parameter so that the following conditionsare satisfied:
� When a one–axis amplifier is used, either the fast type or slow typeinterface can be used.
� When a two–axis amplifier is used, the use of the fast type for both axesis not allowed. The slow type can be used for both axes.
� When a three–axis amplifier is used, the requirement for a two–axesamplifier described above applies to the first and second axes, and therequirement for a one–axis amplifier, again described above, applies tothe third axis.
� When an odd number is specified for parameter No.1023, the fast typeinterface must be used.
� When an even number is specified for parameter No.1023, only theslow type interface can be used. (The FSL bit must always be set to 1.)
Controlledaxis
number
123456
Programaxis nameNo.1020
XYZABC
Servo axis numberNo.1023
123456
Interfacetype
Fast/Slow
FFSSFS
CNC
2–axisamplifier
2–axisamplifier
1–axisamplifier
X (Fast)
A (Slow)
Y (Fast)
Z (Slow)
B (Fast)
C (Slow)1–axisamplifier
IO1 First axis
The basic unit of the FSSB I/O module in group 1 is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
Second axis
The expansion unit of the FSSB I/O module in group 1 is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
76
IO2 First axis
The basic unit of the FSSB I/O module in group 2 is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
Second axis
The expansion unit of the FSSB I/O module in group 2 is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
NOTE1 In any group, do not specify that only the expansion unit is
to be used.2 When this parameter ise set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
PM1 The first pulse module is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
PM2 The second pulse module is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
NOTEWhen automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting(when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is setto 0), parameter No.1905 is automatically set when input isperformed with the FSSB setting screen. When manualsetting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMDparameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 1),parameter No.1905 must be set directly. When a pulsemodule is used, a connector number must be set in thecorresponding parameter (No.1936 or No.1937).
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
77
1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR)
1911 Address conversion table value for slave 2 (ATR)
1912 Address conversion table value for slave 3 (ATR)
1913 Address conversion table value for slave 4 (ATR)
1914 Address conversion table value for slave 5 (ATR)
1915 Address conversion table value for slave 6 (ATR)
1916 Address conversion table value for slave 7 (ATR)
1917 Address conversion table value for slave 8 (ATR)
1918 Address conversion table value for slave 9 (ATR)
1919 Address conversion table value for slave 10 (ATR)
NOTEAfter these parameters have been set, the power must beturned off then back on for the settings to become effective.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 16, 40, 48
These parameters set address conversion table values for slaves 1 to 10.
A slave is the generic name given to a device such as a servo amplifier orpulse module, connected to the CNC via an FSSB optical cable. Smallernumbers, starting from 1 are assigned to slaves closer to the CNC; themaximum number that can be assigned is 10. A two–axis amplifier hastwo slaves, while a three–axis amplifier has three slaves. Set eachparameter as described below, depending on whether the slave is anamplifier or pulse module, or when no slave exists.
� When the slave is an amplifier:Set the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of parameterNo.1023 for the axis to which the amplifier is assigned.
� When the slave is a pulse module:Set 16 for the first pulse module (closest to the CNC). Set 48 for thesecond pulse module (furthest from the CNC).
� When no slave existsSet 40.
NOTEWhen automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting(when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is setto 0), parameters No.1910 through No.1919 are automaticallyset when input is performed with the FSSB setting screen.When manual setting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting(when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is setto 1), parameter No.1910 through No.1919 must be directlyset.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
78
� Examples of axis configurations and parameter settings
PowerMate
1–axisamplifier
2–axisamplifier
2–axisamplifier
M1 1–axisamplifier
M2
Xaxis
Yaxis
Zaxis
Aaxis
Baxis
Caxis
Optical cable
(1)
slave number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
If the connection shown above is made, the relationships between theparameters and their settings are as shown below.
Servo axisnumberNo. 1023
Addressconversiontable valueNo. 1910 to1919
1 0
2 1
3 2
4 3
5 4
6 5
Controlledaxis number(n–th axis)
AxisnameNo. 1020
1 X
2 Y
3 Z
4 A
5 B
6 C
Connection viewed from Power Mate
Slavenumber
Axis
1(No.1910)
X 1–axisamplifier
2(No.1911)
Y
3(No.1912)
Z
2–axisamplifier
4(No.1913)
A
5(No.1914)
B
2–axisamplifier
6(No.1915)
M1
7(No.1916)
C 1–axisamplifier
8(No.1917)
M2
9(No.1918)
None
10(No.1919)
None
M1/M2 : First pulse module/second pulse module
Note)Values to be set in the parameters that have notbeen set up in the above table:
No.1915=16No.1917=48No.1918=40No.1919=40
Connection viewed from FSSB
Means that parameterNo. 1916 is to be set to 5.
Servo conrtol unit
Means that parameterNo. 1023 (C–axis) is tobe set to 6.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
79
(2)
Slave number 1 2 3 4 5 6
Tandem
PowerMate
1–axisamplifier
1–axisamplifier
2–axisamplifier
1–axisamplifier
1–axisamplifier
Optical cable
Tandem
Xaxis
Baxis
Yaxis
Zaxis
Aaxis
Caxis
(SLAVE)
If the connection shown above is made, the relationships between theparameters and their settings are as shown below.
NOTEIn the above figure, the X– and A–axes are under tandemcontrol. The B–axis is a tandem slave axis with respect tothe X–axis, and the C–axis is a tandem slave axis withrespect to the A–axis.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
80
Servo axisnumberNo. 1023
Addressconversiontable valueNo. 1910 to1919
1 0
2 1
3 2
4 3
5 4
6 5
Connection viewed from Power Mate
Slavenumber
Axis
1(No.1910)
1–axisamplifier
2(No.1911)
3(No.1912)
4(No.1913)
5(No.1914)
6(No.1915)
7(No.1916)
8(No.1917)
9(No.1918)
None
10(No.1919)
None
Note)Values to be set in the parameters that have notbeen set up in the above table:
No.1916=40No.1917=40No.1918=40No.1919=40
Connection viewed from FSSB
Means that parameterNo. 1915 is to be set to 5.
Servo conrtol unit
1 X
(Tandemmaster axis)
2 Y
3 Z
4 A
5 B
6 C
Controlledaxis number(n–th axis)
AxisnameNo. 1020
(Tandemmaster axis)
(Tandem slaveaxis with respectto the X–axis)
(Tandem slaveaxis with respectto the A–axis)
Means that parameterNo. 1023 (B–axis) is tobe set to 2.
1–axisamplifier
1–axisamplifier
1–axisamplifier
None
None
2–axisamplifier
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
81
1920 Controlled axis number for slave 1 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1921 Controlled axis number for slave 2 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1922 Controlled axis number for slave 3 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1923 Controlled axis number for slave 4 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1924 Controlled axis number for slave 5 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1925 Controlled axis number for slave 6 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1926 Controlled axis number for slave 7 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1927 Controlled axis number for slave 8 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1928 Controlled axis number for slave 9 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1929 Controlled axis number for slave 10 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
NOTEAfter these parameters have been set, the power must beturned off then back on for the settings to become effective.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
These parameters are used to set the controlled axis numbers for slaves 1to 10.
NOTEThese parameters are set using the FSSB setting screen.So, these parameters should not normally have to bespecified directly. These parameters need not be set inFSSB manual setting mode.
1931 Connector number for the first pulse module (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
1932 Connector number for the second pulse module (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
NOTEAfter these parameters have been set, the power must beturned off then back on for the settings to become effective.
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to number of connectors provided on each pulse module
When a pulse module is used, these parameters set a pulse moduleconnector number for each axis.
NOTEThese parameters are set using the FSSB setting screen.So, these parameters should not normally have to bespecified directly. These parameters need not be set inFSSB manual setting 2 mode.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
82
1934Master and slave axis numbers subject to tandem control
(dedicated to the FSSB setting screen)
NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be turnedoff then back on for the setting to become effective.
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
This parameter is used to set an odd number, and the subsequent evennumber, for a master axis and slave axis subject to tandem control,respectively.
NOTEThis parameter is set using the FSSB setting screen. So,this parameter should not normally have to be specifieddirectly. This parameter need not be set in FSSB manualsetting 2 mode.
1936 Connector number of the first pulse module
1937 Connector number of the second pulse module
NOTEAfter these parameters have been set, the power must beturned off then back on for the settings to become effective.
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 7
When a pulse module is used, each of these parameters sets the valueobtained by subtracting 1 from a pulse module connector number for eachaxis. That is, values of 0 through 7 are set for connector numbers 1through 8. In addition, bits 6 and 7 of parameter No.1905 must be set. Foran axis that does not use a pulse module, 0 must be set.The user can freely specify the connector to be used for a given axis.When using connectors, start from that connector having the smallestconnector number. For example, connector number 4 cannot be used ifconnector number 3 is not being used.Example:
Controlledaxis
Connectornumber for
the first pulsemodule
Connectornumber forthe second
pulse module
No.1936 No.1937 No.1905(#7, #6)
X 1 Not used 0 0 0,1
Y Not used 2 0 1 1,0
Z Not used 1 0 0 1,0
A Not used Not used 0 0 0,0
B 2 Not used 1 0 0,1
C Not used 3 0 2 1,0
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
83
1960Start address of the R area to which the DI bit information of the FSSB I/O mod-
ule in group 1 is sent
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] The range of values that can be set varies with the PMC model.
PMC model Range of the R area that can be set
PMC–SB5 0 to 1499, 9100 to 9117
PMC–SB6 0 to 2999, 9100 to 9117
1961Size of the R area to which the DI bit information of the FSSB I/O module in
group 1 is sent
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 4 (if only the basic unit is to be used)0 to 8 (if both the basic and expansion units are to be used)
1962Start address of the R area where the bit information to be output to the DO of
the FSSB I/O module in group 1 is stored
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] The range of values that can be set varies with the PMC model.
PMC model Range of the R area that can be set
PMC–SB5 0 to 1499, 9100 to 9117
PMC–SB6 0 to 2999, 9100 to 9117
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
84
1963Size of the R area where the bit information to be output to the DO of the FSSB
I/O module in group 1 is stored
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 3 (if only the basic unit is to be used)0 to 6 (if both the basic and expansion units are to be used)
1964Start address of the R area to which the DI bit information of the FSSB I/O mod-
ule in group 2 is sent
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] The range of values that can be set varies with the PMC model.
PMC model Range of the R area that can be set
PMC–SB5 0 to 1499, 9100 to 9117
PMC–SB6 0 to 2999, 9100 to 9117
1965Address of the R area to which the DI bit information of the FSSB I/O module in
group 2 is sent
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 4 (if only the basic unit is to be used)0 to 8 (if both the basic and expansion units are to be used)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
85
1966Address of the R area to which the DO bit information of the FSSB I/O module
in group 2 is sent
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] The range of values that can be set varies with the PMC model.
PMC model Range of the R area that can be set
PMC–SB5 0 to 1499, 9100 to 9117
PMC–SB6 0 to 2999, 9100 to 9117
1967Size of the R area where the bit information to be output to the DO of the FSSB
I/O module in group 2 is stored
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 3 (if only the basic unit is to be used)0 to 6 (if both the basic and expansion units are to be used)
The effective DI data of the FSSB I/O module begins at the address set inparameter No. 1960 or 1964 and its size is specified in parameter No. 1961or 1965.The effective DO data of the FSSB I/O module begins at the address set inparameter No. 1962 or 1966 and its size is specified in parameter No. 1963or 1967.If bit 4 (IO1) of parameter No. 1905 is 1, data for the first unit is valid, andif bit 5 (IO2) of parameter No. 1905 is 1, data for the second unit is valid.
1968 Address of the R area to which information about a DO alarm is output
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] The range of values that can be set varies with the PMC model.
PMC model Range of the R area that can be set
PMC–SB5 0 to 1499, 9100 to 9117
PMC–SB6 0 to 2999, 9100 to 9117
Specify the address of the R area to which information about the unit thatencountered an alarm condition (if occurred) is to be reported.R addressinformation specified in parameter No. 1968
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
86
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3EXDVAL2
#2DVAL2
#1EXDVAL1
#0DVAL1
If each bit is “1”, it has the following meaning:
DVAL1: A DO alarm condition was detected in the basic unit in group1.
EXDVAL1:A DO alarm condition was detected in the expansion unit ingroup 1.
DVAL2: A DO alarm condition was detected in the basic unit in group2.
EXDVAL2:A DO alarm condition was detected in the expansion unit ingroup 2.
NOTEWhen automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting(when bit 0 of parameter No.1902 is set to 0), theseparameters are automatically set when input is performedwith the FSSB setting screen. When manual setting 2 modeis selected for FSSB setting (when bit 0 of parameterNo.1902 is set to 1), these parameters must be set directly.
The following parameters are not explained in this manual. Refer toFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi/βi Series PARAMETER MANUAL(B–65270EN).
No. Data type Contents2000 Bit axis PGEX ��% DGPR PLC0
2001 Bit axis AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0
2002 Bit axis &'�( �'�(
2003 Bit axis V0FS OVSC BLEN )PSP PIEN OBEN TGAL
2004 Bit axis DLY0
2005 Bit axis �'% BRKC FEED
2006 Bit axis DCBE ACCF PKVE FCBL
2007 Bit axis '�* FAD
2008 Bit axis +*,- �'.� &�% ��� ���� &'.* �)�%
2009 Bit axis BLST BLCU ADBL $�. SERD
2010 Bit axis HBBL HBPE BLT( LINE
2011 Bit axis RCCL FFALWY SYNMOD
2012 Bit axis ��)/ VCM2 VCM1 MSFE
2013 Bit axis (Reserve)
2014 Bit axis (Reserve)
2015 Bit axis BLAT TDOU SSG1 PGTW
2016 Bit axis 0�& ABNT
2017 Bit axis PK25 �&� �� 1�)/ DBS�
2018 Bit axis PFBC MOVO
2019 Bit axis DPFB
2020 Word axis Motor number
2021 Word axis Load inertia ratio
2022 Word axis Direction of motor rotation
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
87
No. ContentsData type
2023 Word axis Number of velocity pulses
2024 Word axis Number of position pulses
2028 Word axis Position gain switching speed
2029 Word axis Effective speed for integral acceleration at low speed
2030 Word axis Effective speed for integral acceleration at low speed
2033 Word axis Position feedback pulse
2034 Word axis Damping control gain
2039 Word axis Second–stage acceleration for two–stage backlash acceleration
2040 Word axis Current loop integral gain (PK1)
2041 Word axis Current loop proportional gain (PK2)
2042 Word axis Current loop gain (PK3)
2043 Word axis Velocity loop integral gain (PK1V)
2044 Word axis Velocity loop proportional gain (PK2V)
2045 Word axis Velocity loop incomplete integral gain (PK3V)
2046 Word axis Velocity loop gain (PK4V)
2047 Word axis Observer parameter (POA1)
2048 Word axis Backlash acceleration
2049 Word axis Maximum amplitude for dual position feedback
2050 Word axis Observer parameter (POK1)
2051 Word axis Observer parameter (POK2)
2053 Word axis Current dead zone compensation (PPMAX)
2054 Word axis Current dead zone compensation (PDDP)
2055 Word axis Current dead zone compensation (PHYST)
2056 Word axis Counterelectromotive force compensation (EMFCMP)
2057 Word axis Current phase lead compensation (PVPA)
2058 Word axis Current phase lead compensation (PALPH)
2059 Word axis Counterelectromotive force compensation (EMFBAS)
2060 Word axis Torque limit
2061 Word axis Counterelectromotive force compensation (EMFLMT)
2062 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC1)
2063 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC2)
2064 Word axis Soft disconnection alarm level
2065 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OCVLMT)
2066 Word axis 250–us acceleration feedback
2067 Word axis Torque command filter
2068 Word axis Feed forward coefficient
2069 Word axis Velocity feed forward coefficient
2070 Word axis Backlash acceleration timing
2071 Word axis Backlash acceleration effective duration
2072 Word axis Static friction compensation
2073 Word axis Stop judgment parameter
2074 Word axis Velocity–dependent current loop gain
2076 Word axis 1–ms acceleration feedback gain
2077 Word axis Overshoot prevention counter
2078 Word axis Conversion coefficient for dual position feedback (numerator)
2079 Word axis Conversion coefficient for dual position feedback (denominator)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
88
No. ContentsData type
2080 Word axis First–order lag time constant for dual position feedback
2081 Word axis Zero width for dual position feedback
2082 Word axis Backlash acceleration stop amount
2083 Word axis Brake control timer (ms)
2084 Word axis Flexible feed gear (numerator)
2085 Word axis Flexible feed gear (denominator)
2086 Word axis Rated current parameter
2087 Word axis Torque offset
2088 Word axis Machine velocity feedback coefficient gain
2089 Word axis Backlash acceleration base pulse
2091 Word axis Non–linear control parameter
2092 Word axis Look–ahead feed forward coefficient
2097 Word axis Static friction compensation stop parameter
2098 Word axis Current phase lead compensation coefficient
2099 Word axis N–pulse suppression level
2101 Word axis Overshoot compensation effective level
2102 Word axis Final clamp value for actual current limit
2103 Word axis Amount of track back upon detection of unexpected disturbance torque
2104 Word axis Threshold for detecting abnormal load during cutting
2105 Word axis Torque constant
2109 Word axis Fine acceleration/deceleration time constant (BELLTC)
2110 Word axis Magnetic saturation compensation (base/coefficient)
2111 Word axis Deceleration torque limit (base/coefficient)
2112 Word axis AMR conversion coefficient 1
2113 Word axis Notch filter center frequency (Hz)
2116 Word axis Dynamic friction for abnormal load detection/cancel
2118 Word axis Excessive error level between semi–closed and closed loops for dual position feedback.
2119 Word axis Stop level with variable proportional gain
2126 Word axis Time constant for switching position feedback
���2 Word axis Non–interacting control coefficient
���� Word axis Weak magnetic flux compensation (coefficient)
���� Word axis Weak magnetic flux compensation (base/limit)
��� Word axis Two thrust ripple compensations per magnetic pole pair
���� Word axis Four thrust ripple compensations per magnetic pole pair
���� Word axis Six thrust ripple compensations per magnetic pole pair
���� Word axis AMR conversion coefficient 2
���� Word axis Threshold for detecting abnormal load during rapid traverse
���� Word axis Fine acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 (ms)
���� Word axis Position feed forward coefficient for cutting
���3 Word axis Velocity feed forward coefficient for cutting
2��3 Word axis Maximum amplifier current
�� Bit axis *./� $�.
�� � Bit axis �(( ��'
�� � Bit axis -4*+ �&�� '*/�
�� � Bit axis '��
�� � Bit axis '*-+
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
89
#7MHI3001
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2RWM
#1SON
#0
[Data type] Bit
SON 0 : Starts automatic operation on the falling edge (1 → 0) of the automaticoperation start signal (ST).
1 : Starts automatic operation on the rising edge (0 → 1) of the automaticoperation start signal (ST).
RWM RWD signal indicating that rewinding is in progress0 : Output only when the tape reader is being rewound by the reset and
rewind signal RRW1 : Output when the tape reader is being rewound or a program in
memory is being rewound by the reset and rewind signal RRW
MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, and T codes0 : Normal1 : High–speed
#73002
#6 #5 #4IOV
#3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
IOV For the feedrate override signal and rapid traverse override signal:0 : Negative logic is used.1 : Positive logic is used.
#73003
#6MVX
#5DEC
#4 #3DIT
#2ITX
#1HIL
#0ITL
[Data type] Bit
ITL Interlock signal0 : Enabled1 : Disabled
HIL 0 : Disables the high–speed interlock signal.1 : Enables the high–speed interlock signal.
ITX Interlock signals for each axis0 : Enabled1 : Disabled
DIT Interlock for each axis direction0 : Enabled1 : Disabled
DEC Deceleration signal (*DEC1 to *DEC8) for reference position return0 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0.1 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 1.
MVX The axis–in–movement signal is set to 0 when:0 : Distribution for the axis is completed. (The signal is set to 0 in
deceleration.)1 : Deceleration of the axis is terminated, and the current position is in the
in–position.
4.13PARAMETERS OF DI/DO
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
90
If, however, a parameter specifies not to make in–position duringdeceleration, the signal turns to “0” at the end of deceleration.
#73004
#6 #5OTH
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
OTH The overtravel limit signal is:0 : Checked1 : Not checked
WARNINGFor safety, usually set 0 to check the overtravel limit signal.
#73005
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1BDE
#0
[Data type] Bit
BDE 0 : Does not use the *DEC signal when internal I/O is used.1 : Uses the *DEC signal when internal I/O is used.
NOTEAn X address for which non–use of the *DEC signal isspecified by this parameter may be used for anotherpurpose.
#7CDE3006
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
CDE The *DEC1 signal is:0 : Not used over two axes.1 : Used over two axes.
#73008
#6 #5 #4 #3BIO
#2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
BIO The deceleration signals (such as those for emergency stop, high–speedinterlock, skip, and reference position return) that the Power Matereferences directly are:0 : External I/O1 : Built–in I/O
3010Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, and TF
Time lag in strobe signals MF and TF
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 1 ms
[Valid data range] 16 to 32767
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
91
The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, and TF after the M, S,and T codes are sent, respectively.
M, S, T code
MF, SF, TF signal
Delay time
Fig.4.13 (a) Delay Time of the strobe signal
NOTEThe time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is nota multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.[Example]
When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed.When 100 ie set, 104 ms is assumed.
3011 Acceptable width of M, S, and T function completion signal (FIN)
Acceptable width of M and T function completion signal (FIN)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 1 ms
[Valid data range] 16 to 32767
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M and T function completionsignal (FIN).
M, S, T code
MF, SF, TFsignal
FIN sigal
Ignored be-cause shorterthan min.signal width
Valid becauselonger than min.signal width
Fig.4.13 (b) Valid Width of the FIN (M,S, and T Function Completion) Signal
NOTEThe time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is nota multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.[Example]
When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
92
3017 Output time of reset signal RST
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] 16 ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added isspecified in this parameter.
RST signal output time = time veguired for reset + parameter �16 ms
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
3031Allowable number of digits for the S code
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 8
Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, and T codes.
NOTEUp to 5 digits can be specified in the S code
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
93
3034 Output address of the pulse signal output function
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1000 to 1002 (Y address of internal I/O)
This is the Y address to which the pulse signal is output.It is not necessary to enter the letter Y. Enter only a numerical value.
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
3035 Output bit of the pulse signal output function
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 7
This is the Y address to which the pulse signal is output.
For example, when the address is 1001 and the bit number is 3, the pulsesignal is output to Y1001#3.
NOTE1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.2 Since the built–in I/O output signal is used, confirm that the
signal is not used by a ladder or other function before settingthe address and bit.A signal already used by a ladder or other function cannotbe used.
3 The address bits excluding the bit used by the pulse signalcan be used only by the high–speed position switch.
4.14PARAMETERS OFPULSE SIGNALOUTPUT FUNCTION
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
94
3036 Switching time of output of the pulse signal output function
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Set switching time of output in milliseconds.The signal can be switched in a cycle from 2 msec to 99999998 msec.
NOTEIf a value of 1 or less (1, 0, –1, ...) is set, the pulse signaloutput function is disabled. The pulse signal is not output.When an odd number is set, it is assumed to be aneven–valued period. For example, if 5 is set, an output cycleof 4 msec is assumed.When this parameter (No. 3036) is changed, it is notnecessary to turn off and back on the power. When the cycleset previously is complete, the new cycle takes effect inoutputting the signal.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
95
#73100
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1CEM
#0
[Data type] Bit
CEM On screens such as the operation history screen and help screen, keys onthe MDI panel are indicated:0 : In English.1 : With graphics qualifying for CE marking. (A character generator
supporting graphics qualifying for CE marking is required.)
#73101
#6 #5 #4BGD
#3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
BGD In background editing, a program currently selected in the foreground:0 : Cannot be selected. (BP/S alarm No.140 is issued disabling
selection.)1 : Can be selected. (However, the program cannot be edited, only
displayed.)
#73102
#6SPN
#5HNG
#4ITA
#3 #2FRN
#1GRM
#0JPN
[Data type] Bit
These bits select the Language to be used for the display.
Parameter No.3102CRT display
#6SPN
#5HNG
#4ITA
#2FRN
#1GRM
#0JPN
CRT displayLanguage
0 0 0 0 0 0 English
0 0 0 0 0 1 Japanese
0 0 0 0 1 0 German
0 0 0 1 0 0 French
0 0 1 0 0 0 Italian
0 1 0 0 0 0 Korean
1 0 0 0 0 0 Spanish
NOTE1 When this parameter is set, please turn off the power once.
Then turn it on for machining.2 Germany, French, Italian, Korean and Spanish can be used
only when the corresponding option is specified.3 No language except English can be used on DPL/MDI,
DPL/MDI operation package and Handy operator’s panel.
4.15PARAMETERS OF MDI, DISPLAY, AND EDIT
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
96
#73103
#6 #5 #4NCSNC
#3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
NCSNC When a C language executor screen is displayed , CNC screen displayfunction is0 : Enabled to start or stop.1 : Disabled to start or stop.
NOTE1 When ”1” is set and a C language executor screen is
displayed, the messages of ”CNC refused the start of theCNC screen display function.” in starting and ”Please exitfrom the C–EXE screen.” in stopping are displayed inPOPUP windows on PC.
2 If CNC screen display function cannot start and stop whenyou set ”0”, it is necessary to recompile programs of screensthat is designed by C language executor with library thatsupports CNC screen function and is provided from FANUC.
#73104
#6DAL
#5 #4DRL
#3PPD
#2 #1 #0MCN
[Data type] Bit
MCN Machine position0 : Not displayed according to the unit of input.
(Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machineposition is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches forinch machines.)
1 : Displayed according to the unit of input.(When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm,and when input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed ininches accordingly.)
PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set0 : Not preset1 : Preset
NOTEWhen PPD is set to 1 and the absolute position display ispreset by one of the following, the relative position display isalso preset to the same value as the absolute position display:1) The manual reference position return2) Setting of a coordinate system by G92
DRL Relative position0 : The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool
length offset.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
97
DAL Absolute position0 : The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool
length offset.
#7SMF3105
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2DPS
#1PCF
#0DPF
[Data type] Bit
DPF Display of the actual speed on the current position display screen,program check screen and program screen (MD1 mode)0 : Not displayed1 : Displayed
PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC–controlled axes to the actual speeddisplay0 : Added1 : Not added
NOTEFor each setting, movement along any axis other than thosecontrolled by the CNC (see the description of parameter No.1010) is not reflected in the actual speed display.
DPS Actual spindle speed and T code0 : Not always displayed1 : Always displayed
SMF During simplified synchronous control, movement along a slave axis is:0 : Included in the actual speed display1 : Not included in the actual speed display
(See the parameter No.8311.)
#7OHS3106
#6 #5 #4OPH
#3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
OPH The operation history screen is:0 : Not displayed.1 : Displayed.
OHS Operation history sampling is:0 : Performed.1 : Not performed.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
98
#7MDL3107
#6 #5 #4SOR
#3 #2DNC
#1 #0NAM
[Data type] Bit
NAM Program list0 : Only program numbers are displayed.1 : Program numbers and program names are displayed.
DNC Upon reset, the program display for DNC operation is:0 : Not cleared1 : Cleared
SOR Display of the program directory0 : Programs are listed in the order of registration.1 : Programs are listed in the order of program number.
MDL Display of the modal state on the program display screen0 : Not displayed1 : Displayed (only in the MDI mode)
#7JSP3108
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0CMDS
[Data type] Bit
CMDS In the Actual Position Display0 : Display position for each path1 : Display position includes the position of another path.
NOTE1 Please set the parameter for each path.2 This parameter can be used only two–path control of the
Power Mate i–MODEL D.
JSP On the current position display screen and program check screen, jogfeedrate or dry run feedrate is:0 : Not displayed.1 : Displayed.
NOTEIn manual operation mode, the jog feedrate is displayed. Inautomatic operation mode, the dry run feedrate is displayed.In each case, the feedrate to which a manual feedrateoverride has been applied is displayed.
JOG F 8000 PART COUNT 15RUN TIME 1H17M CYCLE TIME 1H15SACT.F 1000 MM/MAUTO STRT MTN *** 12:34:59[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]Jog
feedrate
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
99
#73109
#6 #5RHD
#4 #3SFM
#2IKY
#1 #0
[Data type] Bit
IKY On the tool offset screen, soft key [INPUT] is:0 : Displayed.1 : Not displayed.
SFM 0 : Displays the soft keys (menu) for pattern data input screen selectionon page 2 of the offset/setting screen, as is usually done.
1 : Displays the soft keys (menu) for pattern data input screen selectionon page 1 of the offset/setting screen.
NOTEFor details of the pattern data input screen, see Section4.27, “Parameters of Pattern Data Input Function.” Patterndata can be used only with a CRT, PDP, or LCD.
RHD When a manual handle interrupt is generated, the relative position display is:0 : Not updated.1 : Updated.
NOTEThis parameter is enabled when the INH parameter (bit 2 ofparameter No.7100) is 1.
#7NPA
3111
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2SVP
#1SPS
#0SVS
SVSNPA
[Data type] Bit
SVS Servo setting screen0 : Not displayed1 : Displayed
SPS Spindle setting screen0 : Not displayed1 : Displayed
SVP Synchronization errors displayed on the spindle tuning screen0 : Instantaneous values are displayed.1 : Peak–hold values are displayed.
NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message isentered0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen.1 : The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
100
#73112
#6 #5OPH
#4 #3EAH
#2 #1 #0
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
EAH Messages of the exfernal alam/macro alarm in alarm history:0 : Not recorded1 : Recorded
OPH The operation history function is:0 : Enabled.1 : Disabled.
#73115
#6 #5 #4 #3NDFx
#2 #1NDAx
#0NDPx
[Data type] Bit axis
NDPx Display of the current position for each axis0 : The current position is displayed.1 : The current position is not displayed.
NDAx Position display using absolute coordinates and relative coordinates is:0 : Performed.1 : Not performed. (Machine coordinates are displayed.)
NDFx To the actual speed display, axis movement data is:0 : Added.1 : Not added.
NOTEEven if the PCF parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.3105) isset to 0, so as to add PMC controlled axis movement datato the actual speed display, the movement data for a PMCcontrolled axis for which NDFx is set to 1 is not added to theactual speed display.
#7MDC3116
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0MDP
[Data type] Bit
MDP 0 : Does not display the memory card output screen on the ALL I/Oscreen.
1 : Displays the memory card output screen on the ALL I/O screen.
MDC 0 : Does not allow all maintenance information to be deleted as a batch bysoft key operation on the maintenance information screen.
1 : Allows all maintenance information to be deleted as a batch by softkey operation on the maintenance information screen.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
101
#7
3118
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0AS1
[Data type] Bit
AS1 When the actual spindle speeds (SACT) of the spindle is displayed, thevalue is:
0 : The value calculated based on the feedback pulses from the positioncoder.
1 : The value calculated from the spindle motor speed (the same as thespindle speed displayed on the operating monitor screen).
#73119
#6TKY
#5 #4 #3TPA
#2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
TPA Connection of a commercial touch panel is:0 : Enabled.1 : Disabled.
TKY The MDI keypad uses the:0 : M series key code for input1 : T series key code for input
NOTEThe change to this setting takes effect next time the poweris turned on.
CAUTIONAs interface data on the Power Mate i side, the followingvalues are automatically set internally.Set the same values for the commercial touch panel.
� Baud rate 19200bps. . . . . . . . . . � Stop bit 1 bit. . . . . . . . . . . . � Parity check even–numbered parity. . . . . . . .
3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Minutes
[Valid data range] 0 to 1439
Time data is recorded in operation history at set intervals. When 0 isspecified in this parameter, 10 minutes is assumed as the default.However, NOTE that time data is not recorded if there is no data to berecorded at the specified time.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
102
3131 Subscript of each axis name
[Data type] Byte axis
This parameter specifies a subscript (one character) of each axis namewith a code (Power Mate i–D two–path control). The one character subscript specified by this parameter is displayed afterthe axis name on the current position screen to discriminate thecoordinates of axes belonging to one path from those of another path.
NOTE1 This parameter is dedicated to the Two–path control.2 Specify this parameter for each path.3 For characters and codes, see the correspondence table in
Appendix 1.4 If code 0 is specified, paths 1 and 2 are displayed,
respectively, as 1 and 2.
[Example] When the configuration of axes is X in path 1 and X in path 2
(1) Setting for path 1Parameter 3131x 65 (A) XA is displayed as axis names.. . .
(2) Setting for path 2Parameter 3131x 66 (B) XB is displayed as axis names.. . .
#7
3137
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TIN
[Data type] Bit
TIN The simultaneous four–axis teach–in function is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
#7
3138
#6
TI7
#5
TI6
#4
TI5
#3
TI4
#2
TI3
#1
TI2
#0
TI1TI8
[Data type] Bit
TIn TIn When the simultaneous four–axis teach–in function is used, the inputaddress for the nth axis is enabled. The address for the specified axisnumber is input.
NOTEIf more than four axes are specified, the first to fourthlowest–numbered axes are enabled.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
103
3139Address P for the simultaneous four–axis teach–in function
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
The value set in this parameter works as address P.
3141 Debice name 1
:3146 Device name 2
[Data type] Byte
First to sixth equipment name character codes. When the CRT/MDI isshared by multiple Power Mate units, these equipment names aredisplayed on the common screen.
NOTEWith the 2–path Power Mate i–D, a path name charactercode is used. Set these parameters for each path.
3170 Number of connected Power Mate units
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 16 (128 to 144)
CRTMAX When the CRT/MDI is shared by multiple Power Mate units, set thenumber of connected Power Mate units. In this parameter, set equipmentparameter #0 only. When 0 is specified, the connection of two Power Mateunits is set. When at least one Power Mate unit with three or morecontrolled axes is to be connected, set a value equal to 128 plus the numberof Power Mate units.
#7DMM3191
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
DMM When a FANUC–made touch panel is used, switching to a full–screendisplay is:0 : Not performed.1 : Performed.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
104
#73194
#6SVI
#5IDW
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
IDW Editing of the servo information screen is:0 : Prohibited.1 : Not prohibited.
SVI The servo information screen is:0 : Displayed.1 : Not displayed.
#73195
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2CPR
#1RENM1
#0CHGCS
[Data type] Bit
CHGCS When the virtual–key of the LCD unit with touch panel is used, the screenswitching to the application of the FANUC PICTURE which is defined bythe following symbol is0 : Operated by [GRPH] key.
(In this case, the screen number is decided by the following list.)
Symbol Soft key number
CRT_USR_AUX 0x0105 USER (small key)–AUX
CRT_USR_MCR 0x0205 USER (small key)–MACRO
CRT_USR_MENU 0x0305 USER (small key)–MENU
1 : Operated by [CUST] key.(In this case, the screen number is decided by the following list.)
Symbol Soft key numberCRT_CST_AUX 0x0106 CRT_CST_AUX (full key)–AUX
CRT_CST_MCR 0x0206 CRT_CST_MCR (full key)–MACRO
CRT_CST_MENU 0x0306 CRT_CST_MENU (full key)–MENU
RENM1 When the ”GRPH” is selected as the key to switch to the applicationscreen of FANUC PICTURE, the key top display is0 : ”GRPH”.1 : ”OPER”.
NOTESet ”0” to the parameter 3195#0 when the CRT/MDI orseparated type MDI is used.And, set the following screen number when the screenswitching to FANUC PICTURE screen is operated by the”CUST/GRPH” key of CRT/MDI or separated type MDI.
Symbol Soft key number
CRT_USR_AUX 0x0105 USER (small key)–AUX
CRT_USR_MCR 0x0205 USER (small key)–MACRO
CRT_USR_MENU 0x0305 USER (small key)–MENU
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
105
CPR By using the function key [SYSTEM], the parameter set supportingscreen0 : Is not displayed.1 : Is displayed.
#73201
#6NPE
#5N99
#4 #3 #2REP
#1RAL
#0RDL
[Data type] Bit
RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control0 : The new program is registered following the programs already
registered.1 : All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is
registered.Note that programs which are protected from being edited are notdeleted.
RAL When programs are registered through the reader/puncher interface0 : All programs are registered.1 : Only one program is registered.
REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number isthe same as that of an existing program0 : An alarm is generated.1 : The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered.
Note that if the existing program is protected from being edited, it isnot deleted, and an alarm is generated.
N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, programregistration is assumed to be:0 : Completed1 : Not completed
NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:0 : Completed1 : Not completed
#73202
#6PSR
#5CPD
#4NE9
#3OSR
#2CND
#1OLV
#0NE8
[Data type] Bit
NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 89990 : Not inhibited1 : Inhibited
The following edit operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified,programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
106
(7) Displaying programsOLV When a program other than the selected program is deleted or output:
0 : The display of the selected program is not held.1 : The display of the selected program is held.
CND By using the [CONDENSE] soft key on the program directory screen, theprogram condensing operation is:0 : Not performed. (The [CONDENSE] soft key is not displayed.)1 : Performed.
OSR In programming number search, when pressing soft key [O.SRH]without inputting program number by key :0 : Search the following program number1 : Operation is invalid
NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 99990 : Not inhibited1 : InhibitedThe following program editing during operation is invalid.
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified,programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program punching (Even when punching of all programs is specified,programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not punched.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing after registration
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programsCPD When an NC program is deleted, a confirmation message and
confirmation soft key are:0 : Not output.1 : Output.
PSR Search for the program number of a protected program0 : Disabled1 : Enabled
#7MCL3203
#6MER
#5MIE
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
MZE After MDI operation is started, program editing during operation is:0 : Enabled1 : Disabled
MER When the last block of a program has been executed at single blockoperation in the MDI mode, the executed block is:0 : Not deleted1 : Deleted
NOTEWhen MER is set to 0, the program is deleted if theend–of–record mark (%) is read and executed. (The mark %is automatically inserted at the end of a program.)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
107
MCL Whether a program prepared in the MDI mode is cleared by reset0 : Not deleted1 : deleted
#73204
#6MKP
#5SPR
#4P9E
#3P8E
#2EXK
#1 #0PAR
[Data type] Bit
PAR Characters [ and ] on a keyboard are:0 : Used as [ and ].1 : Used as ( and ).
EXK The input character extension function is:0 : Not used.1 : Used. (Soft key [C–EXT] is not displayed.)
NOTEThe [C–EXT] soft key is used to select an operation on theprogram screen. This soft key enables the entry of “(”, “)”,and “@” using soft keys.
P8E Editing of subprograms 80000000 to 89999999 is:0 : Not inhibited1 : Inhibited
The following editing types become impossible.
(1) Program deletion (Programs numbered in the 80000000 range willnot be deleted even if all–program deletion is specified.)
(2) Program output (Programs numbered in the 80000000 range will notbe output even if all–program output specified.)
(3) Program search by number
(4) Program editing after registration
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Program display
P9E Editing of subprograms 90000000 to 99999999 are:0 : Not inhibited1 : Inhibited
The following editing types become impossible.
(1) Program deletion (Programs numbered in the 90000000 range willnot be deleted even if all–program deletion is specified.)
(2) Program output (Programs numbered in the 90000000 range will notbe output even if all–program output specified.)
(3) Program search by number
(4) Program editing after registration
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
108
(7) Program displaySPR Program numbers in the 9000 range for specific programs are:
0 : Not added with 900000001 : Added with 90000000
[Example]The program numbers for G codes used to call custom macros are asfollows:SPR = 0: 00009010 to 00009019SPR = 1: 90009010 to 90009019Subprogram numbers 9500 to 9510 used by the pattern data input functionare as follows:SPR = 0: 00009500 to 00009510SPR = 1: 90009500 to 90009510
MKP When M02, M30, or EOR(%) is executed during MDI operation, thecreated MDI program is:0 : Erased automatically.1 : Not erased automatically.
NOTEIf the MER parameter (bit 6 of parameter No.3203) is 1,executing the last block provides a choice of whether toautomatically erase a created program.
#73205
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1CHG
#0COL
[Data type] Bit
COL When a program is displayed or output, any colons (:) in the comments ofthe program are:0 : Converted to letter O1 : Displayed or output as is
CHG When the change function of the extended edit function is used:0 : Once the user has decided whether to make a change, the cursor is
moved to the target position.1 : The cursor is moved to the change source, after which the user can
choose whether to make a change.
#7NS23206
#6 #5S2K
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
NS2 Dual screen of CNC screen display function0 : Is not used.1 : Is used.
NOTE1 In case ”0” is set, single screen of CNC screen display
function is effective as CNC screen display function.2 If you needs to display macro executor or C language
executor screens on PC screen, please set ”1”.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
109
S2K Selecting key control of Dual screen of CNC screen display function isperformed0 : By DI signal (G0295#7).1 : By touching a corner at the upper left side of the screen.
(In this case, the LCD unit with touch panel is required.)
NOTEG295 is available when PMC is SB6. G295 is not availablewhen PMC is SB5.
3216 Increment in sequence numbers inserted automatically
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Set the increment for sequence numbers for automatic sequence numberinsertion (when SEQ, #5 of parameter 0000, is set to 1.)
#73230
#6O48
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
O48 The program number to be used is:0 : 4 digits1 : 8 digits
NOTEChanging this parameter causes all registered programs tobe erased.
#7KEY3290
#6MCM
#5 #4 #3 #2MCV
#1 #0
[Data type] Bit
MCV Macro variable setting by MDI key input is:0 : Not disabled1 : Disabled
MCM The setting of custom macros by MDI key operation is:0 : Enabled regardless of the mode.1 : Enabled only in the MDI mode.
KEY For memory protection keys:0 : The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used.1 : Only the KEY1 signal is used.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
110
NOTEThe functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 orKEY=1.When KEY = 0:– KEY1: Enables a tool offset value to be input.– KEY2: Enables setting data and macro variables to be
input.– KEY3: Enables program registration and editing.– KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be
input.When KEY = 1:– KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and
enables PMC parameter input.– KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
#73291
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0WPT
[Data type] Bit
WPT The input of the tool compensation amount is:0 : Enabled according to memory protection key signal KEY1.1 : Enabled regardless of memory protection key signal KEY1.
#7PKEYP3292
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
PKEYP The ”Parameter Write–Enabled” setting is:0 : Made on the setting screen (conventional specification).1 : Made by the KEYP signal (G046#0).
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
111
#73401
#6 #5ABS
#4MAB
#3 #2 #1 #0DPI
[Data type] Bit
DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimalpoint0 : The least input increment is assumed.1 : The unit of mm, inches, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
MAB Switching between the absolute and incremental commands in MDIoperation0 : Performed by G90 or G911 : Depending on the setting of ABS, #5 of parameter No.3401
ABS Program command in MDI operation0 : Assumed as an incremental command1 : Assumed as an absolute command
NOTEABS is valid when MAB, #4 of parameter No.3401, is set to 1.
#73402
#6CLR
#5 #4 #3G91
#2G19
#1G18
#0G01
[Data type] Bit
G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared0 : G00 mode (positioning)1 : G01 mode (linear interpolation)
G18 and G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
G19 G18 G17, G18 or G19 mode0 0 G18 mode (plane ZX)
0 1 G17 mode (plane XY)
1 0 G19 mode (plane YZ)
G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared0 : G90 mode (absolute command)1 : G91 mode (incremental command)
CLR Reset button on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewindsignal, and emergency stop signal0 : Cause reset state.1 : Cause clear state.
For the reset and clear states, refer to Operator’s manual.
4.16PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
112
#73403
#6AD2
#5CIR
#4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
CIR When neither the distance (I, J, K) from a start point to the center nor an arcradius (R) is specified in circular interpolation (G02, G03):0 : The tool moves to an end point by linear interpolation.1 : P/S alarm No.022 is issued.
AD2 Specification of the same address two or more times in a block is:0 : Enabled1 : Disabled (P/S alarm No.5074)
NOTE1 When 1 is set, specifying two or more G codes of the same
group in a block will also result in an alarm being issued.2 If the M3B parameter (bit 7 of parameter No. 3404) is 1, up
to five and three M codes can be specified, respectively, forthe Power Mate i–H and Power Mate i–D.
#7M3B3404
#6EOR
#5M02
#4M30
#3 #2 #1POL
#0NOP
[Data type] Bit
NOP When a program is executed, a block consisting of an O number, EOB, orN number is:0 : Not ignored, but regarded as being one block.1 : Ignored.
POL For a command address allowing a decimal point, omission of the decimalpoint is:0 : Enabled1 : Disabled (P/S alarm No.5073)
M30 When M30 is specified in a auto operation:0 : M30 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is
automatically searched for. So, when the ready signal FIN is returnedand a reset or reset and rewind operation is not performed, theprogram is executed, starting from the beginning.
1 : M30 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searchedfor. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewindsignal.)
M02 When M02 is specified in auto operation0 : M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automati-
cally searched for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a resetor reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program isexecuted, starting from the beginning.
1 : M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searchedfor. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewindsignal.)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
113
EOR When the end–of–record mark (%) is read during program execution:0 : P/S alarm No.5010 occurs. (Automatic operation is stopped, and the
system enters the alarm state.)1 : No alarm occurs. (Automatic operation is stopped, and the system is
reset.)
M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block0 : One1 : Up to fire (Up to thee for Power Mate i–D)
#73406
#6 #5C05
#4 #3C03
#2C02
#1C01
#0
3407C13
C13
C09
C09
C08
C08
CFH3409
[Data type] Bit
Cxx (xx: 01 to 13) When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 is 1, the reset button on the MDIpanel, the external reset signal, the reset and rewind signal, or emergencystop will,0 : Clear the G code with group number xx.1 : Not clear the G code with group number xx.
CFH When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 is 1, the reset button on the MDIpanel, the external reset signal, the reset and rewind signal, or emergencystop will,0 : Clear F codes, H codes, D codes, and T codes.1 : Not clear F codes, H codes, D codes, and T codes.
3410 Tolerance of arc radius
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data]Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03) is executed, thetolerance for the radius between the start point and the end point is set. Ifthe difference of radii between the start point and the end point exceeds thetolerance set here, a P/S alarm No.20 is informed.
NOTEWhen the set value is 0, the difference of radii is not checked.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
114
3411 M code preventing buffering 1
3412 M code preventing buffering 2
3413 M code preventing buffering 3
� �
3420 M code preventing buffering 10
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processingdirected by an M code must be performed by the machine withoutbuffering the following block, specify the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they arenot specified in these parameters.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
115
3620Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position foreach axis
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Number
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the referenceposition for each axis.
3
2
1
–1
–2
Pitch error compensation value (absolute value)
Reference positionPitch error compensationposition (number)
Compensation position number
Set compensating value
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
+3 –1 –1 +1 +2 –1 –3
Fig.4.17 Pitch Error Compensation Position Number and Value (Example)
In the above example, set 33 as the number of the pitch errorcompensation position for the reference position.
3621Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative positionfor each axis
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Number
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremelynegative position for each axis.
4.17PARAMETERS OF PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION(OPTIONALFUNCTION WITH Power Mate i–H)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
116
3622Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive positionfor each axis
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Number
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremelypositive position for each axis.
NOTEThis value must be larger than set value of parameter(No.3620).
3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] 1
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
Set the magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis.
If the magnification is set to 1, the same unit as the detection unit is usedfor the compensation data. If the magnitication is set to 0, the pith errorcompensation is not valid.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
117
3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data]Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C UnitMillimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equal spacing.The space between two adjacent positions is set for each axis. Theminimum interval between pitch error compensation positions is limitedand obtained from the following equation:
Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions =maximum feedrate (rapid traverse rate)/7500
Units: Minimum interval between pitch error compensationpositions: mm, inch, degMaximum feedrate: mm/min, inch/min, deg/min
Example: When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, the minimuminterval between pitch error compensation positions is 2 mm.
If setting a magnification causes the absolute value of the compensationamount at a compensation position to exceed 100, enlarge the intervalbetween the compensation positions by using a multiple calculated asfollows:
Multiple = maximum compensation amount (absolute value)/128 (Round the remainder up to the nearest integer.)
Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions = Value obtained from the above maximum feedrate x multiple
Example 1) For linear axis� Machine stroke: –400 mm to + 800 mm
� Interval between the pitch error compensation positions: 50 mm
� No.of the compensation position of the reference position: 40
If the above is specified, the No.of the farthest compensation point in thenegative direction is as follows:
No.of the compensation position of the reference position – (Machinestroke length in the negative direction/Interval between thecompensation points) + 1= 40 – 400/50 + 1=33
No.of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is asfollows:
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
118
No.of the compensation position of the reference position + (Machinestroke length in the positive direction/Interval between thecompensation positions)= 40 + 800/50= 56
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and thecompensation position No.is as follows:
Machine coordinate (mm)
Compensationpoint No.
–400 –350 –100 –50 0 50 100 750 800
33 39 40 41 42 56
Therefore, set the parameters as follows:
Parameter Setting
No. 3620: Compensation point number for reference position 40
No. 3621: Compensation point number for farthest point in the negative direction 33
No. 3622: Compensation point number for farthest point in the positive direction 56
No. 3623: Compensation magnification 1
No. 3624: Compensation point interval 50000
The compensation value is output at the compensationn positionNo.corresponding to each section between the coordinates.The following is an example of the compensation values.
No. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Compensationvalues +2 +1 +1 –2 0 –1 0 –1 +2 +1 0 –1 –1 –2 0 +1 +2
Pitch error compensation amount (absolute value)
Reference position
–400 –300 –200 –100 0 100 200 300 400 (mm)–1
–2
–3
–4
+4
+3
+2
+1
Example 2) For the rotation axis� Amount of movement per rotation: 360°� Interval between pitch error compensation position: 45°� No.of the compensation position of the reference position: 60
If the above is specified, the No.of the farthest compensation position inthe negative direction for the rotation axis is always equal to thecompensation position No.of the reference position.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
119
The No.of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction isas follows:
No.of the compensation position of the reference position + (Moveamount per rotation/Interval between the compensation position)= 60 + 360/45= 68
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and thecompensation position No.is as follows:
The compensation value is output at the circled position.
If the sum of the compensation value from 61 to 68 is not zero, the pitcherror per rotation accumulates, resulting in a positional shift.
For compensation position 60, set the same compensation value as for 68.
Reference position 0.0
315.0
270.0
225.0
180.0
135.0
90.0
45.0(68)
(60)
(67)
(66)
(65)(64)
(63)
(62)
(61)
(+)
Set the parameters as follows:
Parameter Setting
No. 3620: Compensation point number for reference position 60
No. 3621: Compensation point number for farthest point in the negative direction 60
No. 3622: Compensation point number for farthest point in the positive direction 68
No. 3623: Compensation magnification 1
No. 3624: Compensation point interval 45000
The following is an example of compensation values.
No.of the compensation position
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Compensation value +1 –2 +1 +3 –1 –1 –3 +2 +1
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
120
Pitch error compensation value(absolute value)
Reference position
090 (deg)
–1
–2
–3
–4
+4
+3
+2
+1
0135 180 225 270 315 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 45
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
121
#7
3701
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ISI
#0
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
ISI The serial interface for the spindles is:0 : Used.1 : Not used.
NOTEIt is used when the CNC is started with serial interface controlfor the serial spindles disabled temporarily (for example, forCNC startup adjustment). Usually, it should be set to 0.
#7
3702
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2OR1
#1 #0
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
OR1 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function isused by the spindle motor0 : Not used1 : Used
#7
3705
#6SFA
#5NSF
#4 #3SGT
#2SGB
#1GST
#0ESF
[Data type] Bit
ESF When the spindle control function (Spindle analog outpu or Spindle serialoutput) is used, and the constant surface speed control function is used orbit 4 (GTT) of parameter No.3705 is set to 1:0 : S codes and SF are output for all S commands.1 : S codes and SF are not output for an S command in constant surface
speed control mode (G96 mode) or for an S command used to specifymaximum spindle speed clamping.
NOTESF is not output:(1) For an S command used to specify maximum spindle
speed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface speedcontrol mode
(2) When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No.3705 is set to 1
4.18PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
122
GST The SOR signal is used for:0 : Spindle orientation1 : Gear shift
SGB Gear switching method0 : Method A (Parameters 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle speed
at each gear are used for gear selection.)1 : Method B (Parameters 3751 and 3752 for the spindle speed at the gear
switching point are used for gear selection.)SGT Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74)
0 : Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method)1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the
spindle speed set in parameters 3761 and 3762).NSF When an S code command is issued in constant surface speed control,
0 : SF is output.1 : SF is not output.
SFA The SF signal is output:0 : When gears are switched.1 : Irrespective of whether gears are switched.
#7TCW
3706
#6CWM
#5ORM
#4GTT
#3 #2 #1PG2
#0PG1
[Data type] BitPG2 and PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder
Namber of spindle revolutions
Number of position coder revolutions
Magnification PG2 PG1
�1 0 0
�2 0 1 Magnification=�4 1 0
�8 1 1
GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method0: Type M.1 : Type T.
NOTE1 Type M:
The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to anS command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speedrange of each gear specified beforehand in parameters.Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputtingthe gear selection signal. The spindle speed correspondingto the gear selected by the gear selection signal is output.Type T:The gear selection signal is entered. The spindlespeed corresponding to the gear selected by this signal isoutput.
2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,type T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter isspecified.
3 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the followingparameters have no effect: No.3705#2 SGB, No.3751, No.3752, No.3705#3 SGT, No.3761, No.3762, No.3705#6 SFA, No.3735, No.3736However, parameter No.3744 is valid.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
123
ORM Voltage polarity during spindle orientation0 : Positive1 : Negative
TCW, CWM Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is output
TCW CWM Voltage polarity0 0 Both M03 and M04 positive
0 1 Both M03 and M04 negative
1 0 M03 positive, M04 negative
1 1 M03 negative, M04 positive
#7
3708
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0SAR
[Data type] Bit
SAR The spindle speed arrival signal is:0 : Not checked1 : Checked
3730Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.1 %
[Valid data range] 700 to 1250
Set data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed.
[Adjustment method](1) Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter.(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle
speed is the maximum voltage (10 V).(3) Measure the output voltage.(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter
No.3730.
Set value= × 1000Measured data (V)
10 (V)
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that theanalog output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirmthat the output voltage is 10V.
NOTEThis parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
124
3731
Compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the spindlespeed
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Velo
[Valid data range] –1024 to+1024
Set compesation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of thespindle speed. Set value =–8191�Offset voltage (V)/12.5
[Adjustment method](1) Assign standard value 0 to the parameter.(2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle
speed is 0.(3) Measure the output voltage.(4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter
No.3731.
Set value=12.5
–8191 × Offset voltage (V)
(5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that theanalog output of the spindle speed is 0. Confirm that the outputvoltage is 0V.
NOTEThis parameter need not to be set for serial spindles.
3732
The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed duringspindle gear shift
[Data type] 2–word
[Valid data range] 0 to 20000
Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motorspeed during gear shift.
When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 0, set the spindle speed duringspindle orientation in min–1.
When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 1, set the spindle motor speedduring spindle gear shift calculated from the following formula.
For a serial spindle
Set value = × 16383Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
Maximum spindle motor speed
For an analog spindle
Set value = × 4095Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift
Maximum spindle motor speed
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
125
3735Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 4095
Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motorSet value = × 4095Maximum spindle motor speed
3736Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 4095
Set the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motorSet value = × 4095Maximum spindle motor speed
Spindle motor speed
Max. speed (4095, 10V)
Spindle motor max.clamp speed(Parameter No.3736)
Spindle motor minimumclamp speed (Parameter No.3735)
Spindle speed (S command)
Fig.4.18 (a) Maximum Clamp Speed of Spindle Motor
3740Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 225
Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to thechecking of the spindle speed arrival signal.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
126
3741Maximum spindle speed for gear 1
3742Maximum spindle speed for gear 2
3743Maximum spindle speed for gear 3
3744Maximum spindle speed for gear 4
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] min–1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear.
Spindle speedcommand (S command)
Spindle motor speed
Max. speed (4095, 10V)
Spindle motor max.clamp speed (Parameter No.3736)
Spindle motor mini-mum clamp speed (Parameter No.3735)
Gear 1 Max. speed(Parameter No.3741)
Gear 2 Max. speed(Parameter No.3742)
Gear 3 Max. speed(Parameter No.3743)
Fig.4.18 (b) Maximum Spindle Speed Corresponding to Gear 1/2/3
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
127
3751Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2
3752Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 4095
For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gearsare switched.
Set value = × 4095Spindle motor speed when the gears are switched
Maximum spindle motor speed
Spindle motor max. clamp speed Parameter No.3736
Parameter No.3752
Spindle speed command (S command)
Max. speed (4095, 10V)
Speed at gear 1–2 change point Parameter No.3751
Spindle motor minimum clampspeed
Parameter No.3735
Spindle motor speed
Gear 1max.speed parameterNo.3741
Gear 2max.speed parameterNo.3742
Gear 3maxspeed parameterNo.3743
Gear 1–2change point(Parameter No.3751)
Gear 2–3change point(Parameter No.3752)
Speed at gear 2–3 change point
Fig.4.18 (c) Spindle Motor Speed at Gear 1–2/2–3 Change Point
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
128
3761Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping
3762Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping
[Data type] Word[Unit of data] min–1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 3705, is set to 1) for thetapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed when the gearsare switched.
Max. speed (4095, 10V)
Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No.3736)
Spindle motor minimumclamp speed (Parameter No.3735)
Spindle motor speed
Spindle speedcommand (S command)
Gear 1Max.speed ParameterNo.3741
Gear 2Max.speed ParameterNo.3742
Gear 3Max.speed ParameterNo.3743
Gear 1–2 change point (Parameter No.3761)
Gear 2–3change point (Parameter No.3762)
Fig.4.18 (d) Spindle Motor Speed at Gear 1–2/2–3 Change Point during Tapping
3770Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control
[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., number of control axes
Set the axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control.
NOTEWhen 0 is set, constant surface speed control is alwaysapplied to the X–axis. In this case, specifying P in a G96block has no effect on the constant surface speed control.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
129
3771Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] min–1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed controlmode (G96). The spindle speed in constant surface speed control is clamped to thespeed given by parameter 3771.
3772Maximum spindle speed
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] min–1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed ofthe spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximumspeed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed isclamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter.
NOTE1 This parameter is valid when the constant surface speed
control option is selected.2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed,regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is specified.
3 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle isnot clamped.
4 When spindle speed command control is applied using thePMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed isnot clamped.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
130
Table 4.18 Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (1/7)
No. Data type Description40004001400240034004400540064007400840084009
BitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBit
Bit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameter
4010401140124013401440154016401740184019
BitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBit
Bit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameter (Cannot be changed by the user. See Note 1.)Bit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameter (for setting parameters automatically. See Note 2.)
4020402140224023402440254026402740284029
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Maximum motor speed
Speed arrival detection levelSpeed detection levelSpeed zero detection levelTorque limit valueLoad detection level 1Load detection level 2Output limit patternOutput limit value
403040314032
4033403440354036403740384039
WordWordWord
WordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Soft start/stop timePosition coder method orientation stop position
Orientation speedSlip compensation gain
4040404140424043404440454046404740484049
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Normal velocity loop proportional gain (HIGH)Normal velocity loop proportional gain (LOW)Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (HIGH)Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (LOW)Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode (HIGH)Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode (LOW)
Normal velocity loop integral gain (HIGH)Normal velocity loop integral gain (LOW)
4050405140524053405440554056405740584059
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Velocity loop integral gain during orientation (HIGH)Velocity loop integral gain during orientation (LOW)Velocity loop integral gain in servo model (HIGH)Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode (LOW)
Gear ratio (HIGH)Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH)Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW)Gear ratio (LOW)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
131
Table 4.18 Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (2/7)
No. DescriptionData type4060406140624063406440654066406740684069
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Position gain during orientation (HIGH)Position gain during orientation (MEDIUM HIGH)Position gain during orientation (MEDIUM LOW)Position gain during orientation (LOW)Position gain change ratio when orientation is completedPosition gain in servo mode (HIGH)Position gain in servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH)Position gain in servo mode (MEDIUM LOW)Position gain in servo mode (LOW)
4070407140724073407440754076407740784079
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Grid shift amount in servo mode
Orientation completion signal detection levelMotor velocity limit value during orientationOrientation stop position shift amountMS signal constant = (L/2)/(2 x π x H) x 4096MS signal gain adjustment
4080408140824083408440854086408740884089
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Regenerative power limitDelay time prior motor power shut–offAcceleration/deceleration time settingMotor voltage during normal rotationMotor voltage during orientationMotor voltage in servo mode
Over–speed detection levelExcessive velocity deviation detection level when the motor is constrainedExcessive velocity deviation detection level when the motor is rotated
4090409140924093409440954096409740984099
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Overload detection levelPosition gain change ratio when returning to the origin in the servo mode
Reserved
Speed meter output voltage adjustment valueLoad meter output voltage adjustment value
Maximum speed at which position coder signal can be detectedDelay time for energizing the motor
4100410141024103410441054106410741084109
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Base velocity of the motor output specificationLimit value for the motor output specificationBase speedMagnetic flux weakening start velocityCurrent loop proportional gain during normal operation
Current loop integral gain during normal operation
Zero point of current loop integral gain Current loop proportional gain velocity factor
4110411141124113411441154116411741184119
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Current conversion constantSecondary current factor for exciting currentCurrent expectation constantSlip constantHigh–speed rotation slip compensation constantCompensation constant of voltage applied to motor in the dead zoneElectromotive force compensation constantElectromotive force phase compensation constantElectromotive force compensation velocity factorTime constant of voltage filter for electromotive force compensation
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
132
Table 4.18 Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (3/7)
No. DescriptionData type4120412141224123412441254126412741284129
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Dead zone compensation dataTime constant for changing the torqueVelocity filterOverload detection time settingVoltage compensation factor during decelerationTimer during automatic runningVelocity command during automatic runningLoad meter displayed value for maximum outputMaximum output zero pointSecondary current factor during rigid tapping
4130413141324133413441354136413741384139
WordWordWordWord
2–Word2–Word
WordWordWordWord
Constant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive force at deceleration
Conversion constant of the phase–V currentMotor model codeReserved
Motor voltage during normal rotationMotor voltage in the servo mode/synchronous control modeBase speed of the motor output specificationsLimit value for the motor output specifications
4140414141424143414441454146414741484149
WordWordWordWord
2–word2–wordWordWordWordWord
Base speedMagnetic flux weakening start velocityCurrent loop proportional gain during normal operationCurrent loop integral gain during normal operationZero point of the current loop integral gain Velocity factor of the current loop proportional gain Current conversion constantSecondary current factor for activating currentCurrent expectation constantSlip constant
4150415141524153415441554156415741584159
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
High–speed rotation slip compensation constantCompensation constant for voltage applied to motor in the dead zoneElectromotive force compensation constantElectromotive force phase compensation constantVelocity factor of the electromotive force compensation Voltage compensation factor during decelerationSlip compensation gainTime constant for changing the torqueMaximum output zero pointSecondary current factor during rigid tapping
4160416141624163416441654166416741684169
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Hysteresis of the speed detection levelConstant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive for at deceleration
Conversion constant of phase–V currentTime constant of voltage filter for eletromotive force compensationRegenerative power limitReservedOverload current alarm detection level (for low speed characteristic)Overload current alarm detection time constant
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
133
Table 4.18 Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (4/7)
No. DescriptionData type41704171
4172417341744175
41764177417841794180418141824183418441854186418741884189
WordWord
WordWordWordWord
BitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBitBit
Overload current alarm detection level (for high speed characteristic)Arbitrary gear data between spindle and Position coder (HIGH No.of teeth on the spindle)Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (HIGH No.of teeth on PC)Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (LOW No.of teeth on spindle)Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (LOW No.of teeth on PC)Delay timer at ON of electromagnetic contactor in unit (S series)Spindle analog override zero level (α series)Bit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameter
4190419141924193419441954196419741984199
BitBitBitBitBitBit
WordWordWordWord
Bit parameterBit parameter (Cannot be changed by the user. See Note 1.)Bit parameterBit parameterBit parameterBit parameter (For setting parameters automatically. See Note 2.)Maximum motor speedReached speed levelSpeed detection levelSpeed zero detection level
4200420142024203420442054206420742084209
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Torque limit valueLoad detection level 1Output limit patternOutput limit valuePosition coder method orientation stop positionOrientation speedProportional gain (HIGH) of the normal velocity loopProportional gain (LOW) of the normal velocity loopVelocity loop proportional gain during orientation (HIGH)Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (LOW)
4210421142124213421442154216421742184219
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Velocity loop proportional gain in the servo mode (HIGH)Velocity loop proportional gain in the servo mode (LOW)Normal velocity loop integral gainVelocity loop integral gain during orientationVelocity loop integral gain in the servo mode (HIGH)ReservedGear ratio (HIGH)Gear ratio (LOW)Position gain during orientation (HIGH)Position gain during orientation (LOW)
4220422142224223422442254226422742284229
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Position gain change ratio when orientation is completedPosition gain in the servo mode (HIGH)Position gain in the servo mode (LOW)Grid shift amount in the servo modeReservedReservedDetection level of orientation completion signal Motor velocity limit value during orientationShift amount of orientation stop position MS signal constant = (L/2)/(2 x π x H) x 4096
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
134
Table 4.18 Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (5/7)
No. DescriptionData type4230423142324233423442354236423742384239
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
MS signal gain adjustmentRegenerative power limitDelay time up to motor power shut–offAcceleration/deceleration time settingSpindle load monitor observer gain 1Spindle load monitor observer gain 2Motor voltage during normal rotationMotor voltage during orientationMotor voltage in the servo modePosition gain change ratio when returning to the origin in the servo mode
4240424142424243
4244
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249
WordWordWordWord
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
ReservedArbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (SUB/HIGH No.of teeth on spindle)Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (SUB/HIGH No.of teeth on PC)Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (SUB/LOW No.of teeth on spindle)Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (SUB/LOW No.of teeth on PC)Word Spindle load monitor magnetic flux compensation time constant (for high–speed characteristic on the MAIN side)Word Spindle load motor torque constant (for high–speed characteristic on the MAIN side)Word Spindle load monitor observer gain 1 (on the MAIN side)
42504251
4252
4253
425442554256425742584259
WordWord
Word
Word
WordWordWordWordWordWord
Word Spindle load monitor observer gain 2 (on the MAIN side)Word Spindle load monitor magnetic flux compensation time constant (for low–speed characteristic on the MAIN side)Word Spindle load monitor magnetic flux compensation time constant (for high–speed characteristic)Word Spindle load monitor magnetic flux compensation time constant (for low–speed characteristic)Word Slip correction gain (for high–speed characteristic)Word Slip correction gain (for low–speed characteristic)Base velocity of the motor output specificationsLimit value for the motor output specificationsBase speedMagnetic flux weakening start velocity
4260426142624263426442654266426742684269
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Current loop proportional gain during normal operationCurrent loop integral gain during normal operationZero point of current loop integral gainVelocity factor of current loop proportional gainCurrent conversion constantSecondary current factor for excitation currentCurrent expectation constantSlip constantCompensation constant for high–speed rotation slipCompensation constant for voltage applied to motor in the dead zone
4270427142724273427442754276427742784279
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Electromotive force compensation constantPhase compensation constant of electromotive forceCompensation velocity factor for electromotive forceTime constant for changing the torqueDisplayed value of load meter for maximum outputMaximum output zero pointSecondary current factor in rigid tappingConstant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive force at decelerationTime constant of the speed detection filterReserved
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
135
Table 4.18 Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (6/7)
No. DescriptionData type42804281
42824283428442854286428742884289
WordWord
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Time constant of voltage filter for electromotive force compensationWord Spindle load monitor torque constant (for low–speed characteristic on the MAIN side)Word Spindle load monitor torque constant (for high–speed characteristic)Word Spindle load monitor torque constant (for low–speed characteristic)Motor voltage during normal rotationMotor voltage in the servo modeBase speed of the motor output specificationsLimit value for the motor output specificationsBase speedMagnetic flux weakening start velocity
4290429142924293429442954296429742984299
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Current loop proportional gain during normal operationCurrent loop integral gain during normal operationZero point of current loop integral gainVelocity factor of current loop proportional gainCurrent conversion constantSecondary current factor for excitation currentCurrent expectation constantSlip constantCompensation constant for high–speed rotation slipCompensation constant for voltage applied to motor in the dead zone
4300430143024303430443054306430743084309
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Electromotive force compensation constantPhase compensation constant for electromotive forceCompensation velocity factor for electromotive forceTime constant for changing the torqueMaximum output zero pointSecondary current factor in rigid tappingConstant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive force at decelerationLimit of regenerative powerTime constant of voltage filter for electromotive voltage compensationMotor model code
4310431143124313431443154316431743184319
2–word2–wordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
ReservedReservedPosition coder method orientation end signal width 2 (MAIN)Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal width 1 (MAIN)Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal width 2 (MAIN)Magnetic sensor method orientation stop position shift amount (MAIN)Position coder method orientation end signal width 2 (SUB)Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal width 1 (SUB)Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal width 2 (SUB)Magnetic sensor method orientation stop position shift amount (SUB)
4320432143224323432443254326432743284329
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Spindle orientation deceleration constant (MAIN/HIGH)Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (MAIN/MEDIUM HIGH)Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (MAIN/MEDIUM LOW)Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (MAIN/LOW)Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (SUB/HIGH)Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (SUB/LOW)Width of pulses when switching to the spindle orientation control mode (MAIN)Width of pulses when switching to the spindle orientation control mode (SUB)Word Position coder–based spindle orientation command multiplication (MAIN)Word Position coder–based spindle orientation command multiplication (SUB)
4330433143324333433443354336433743384339
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Word Motor excitation delay time at spindle orientation (MAIN)Word Motor excitation delay time at spindle orientation (SUB)ReservedReservedNo.of arbitrary pulses of speed detector (MAIN)No.of arbitrary pulses of speed detector (SUB)Magnetic flux change point for spindle synchronus acc./dec/ time calculation.Velocity compensation factor of velocity loop gain (MAIN)Velocity compensation factor of velocity loop gain (SUB)Word Torque clamp level
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
136
Table 4.18 Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (7/7)
No. DescriptionData type4340434143424343434443454346434743484349
WordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWordWord
Word Abnormal load detection levelReservedN pulse suppress
Incomplete integral coefficient
Overload current alarm detection level (for low speed characteristic)Overload current alarm detection time constant
43504351
WordWord
Overload current alarm detection level (for high speed characteristic)Compensation for current detection offset
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
137
Notes on parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface
NOTE1 Among the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface, parameters Nos. 4015
and 4191 cannot be changed by the users.These parameters require to assign optional software to the CNC and are automatically setdepending on the type of the software.
2 To set the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface automatically, set #7 ofparameter No.4019 (if the sub spindle is set in the CNC with the spindle switching function, useparameter No.4195) to 1, assign the model code of the motor to be used to parameter No.4133(if the sub spindle is set in the CNC with the spindle switching function, use parameter No.4309),turn off the power of the CNC and spindle amplifier, and restart the CNC and spindle amplifier.
3 Parameters No.4000 to No.4351 are used in the processing on the spindle amplifier. SeeFANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi/βi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65280EN).
4 The CNC can control up to two spindle amplifier with the serial interface. If two–path control isin use, two spindle amplifiers (one for path 1 and the other for path 2) can be controlled.A spindle amplifier can be controlled in the Series 16 performing single–path control. When thespindle control amplifier provides the spindle switching function, one spindle amplifier cancontrol two spindle motors using the switching function.The output switching function can be used in spindle motors to be connected.Up to four spindles, or eight types, (or, for the Series 16 performing single–path control, up totwo spindles, or 4 types) can be used by switching the spindle motors. (The number of spindlesthat can controlled simultaneously is the same as the number of spindle amplifiers, that is twospindles (or, for the Series 6 performing single–path control, a spindle).) Parameters of thespindle amplifier with the serial interface correspond to the above functions as follows:(1) Parameter No.4000 to No.4351 “S1”: First spindle amplifier(2) Parameter No.4000 to No.4175 : When the spindle switching function is not provided, or for
the main spindle in the spindle amplifier when the function is provided.Parameter No.4176 to No.4351 : For the sub spindle in the spindle amplifier when thespindle switching function is provided.
(3) Parameters at low speed when the output switching function is provided.Parameters No.4136 to No.4175 : When the spindle switching function is not provided, orfor the main spindle when the function is provided.Parameters No.4284 to No.4351 : For the sub spindle when the spindle switching functionis provided.
5 The CNC stores the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface. The CNC sendsthem to the spindle amplifier at the system power on and they are used in the unit.These parameters are sent from the CNC to the spindle amplifier in a batch when: – The CNC is switched on. – The serial spindle is restarted by a reset that is carried out after spindle communication
alarm 749 occurs (because the spindle control unit is switched off or because of noise).If these parameters are rewritten, they are sent from the CNC to the spindle amplifiersequentially when: – The parameters have been entered from the MDI. – The parameters have been entered as programmable (G10). – The parameters have been entered via the reader/punch interface.To set parameters automatically, upload parameters corresponding to the motor model fromthe spindle amplifier to the CNC prior to the procedure specified above.The parameters of the spindle amplifier with serial interface can be changed after thesystem starts. Changing the parameters (No.4000 to No.4351) in the CNC sends them tothe spindle amplifier at an appropriate time and the parameters in the unit are updated. Becareful not to change parameters incorrectly.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
138
#75001
#6EVO
#5 #4 #3TAL
#2 #1TLB
#0TLC
[Data type] Bit type
TLC Tool length compensation0 : Tool length compensation A or B (Conforms to TLB in parameter
No.5001)1 : Tool length compensation C
TLB Tool length compensation axis0 : Always Z axis irrespective of plane specification (Tool length
compensation A)1 : Axis perpendicular to plane specification (G17, G18, and G19) (Tool
length compensation B)
TAL Tool length compensation C0 : Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset1 : Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
EVO Specifies whether an offset is effective in the next block to be buffered orthe next block for which an H code is specified when the offset value ischanged in tool length offset A or B.0 : Next block in which an H code is specified.1 : Next block to be buffered.
#75003
#6LVK
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
LVK Tool length offset value0 : Cleared by reset1 : Not cleared, but held by reset
4.19PARAMETERS OF TOOLCOMPENSATION
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
139
#7M5B
5101
#6M5T
#5RD2
#4RD1
#3 #2 #1 #0FXY
[Data type] Bit
FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:0 : Always the first–axis1 : The axis selected by the program
RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 orG87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection.
RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G190 0 +X +Z +Y
0 1 –X –Z –Y
1 0 +Y +X +Z
1 1 –Y –X –Z
M5T When a spindle rotates from the forward to the reverse direction and viceversa in tapping cycles G84 and G74 for M series, before M04 or M03 isoutput:0 : Outputs M051 : Not output M05
M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87:0 : Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops1 : Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops
#7
5103
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1QZA
#0
[Data type] Bit
QZA When the specification of the depth of cut (Q) for each time is omitted, orif Q0 is specified in a high–speed peck drilling canned cycle (G73) or peckdrilling canned cycle (G83):0 : No alarm is issued.1 : An alarm (No.045) is issued.
4.20PARAMETERS OF CANNED CYCLES
4.20.1Parameter of cannedCycle for Drilling
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
140
5114Return value of high–speed peck drilling cycle G73
[Data type] Word[Unit of data]
Increment system � !� � !# � !� UnitMillimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the return value in high–speed peck drilling cycleG73.
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
Z point
q
q
q
d
d
G73 for M series
Fig.4.20.1 (a) High–speed Peck Drilling Cycle G73
5115Clearance of canned cycle G83
[Data type] Word[Unit of data]
Increment system � !� � !# � !� UnitMillimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the clearance of peck drilling cycle G83.
G83
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
Z point
q
q
q
d
d
Fig.4.20.1 (b) Peck drilling cycle G83
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
141
#7
5200
#6FHD
#5PCP
#4DOV
#3 #2CRG
#1VGR
#0G84
[Data type] Bit
G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the
issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No.5210).1 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used. (G84
cannot be used as a G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be usedfor the reverse tapping cycle.)
VGR Any gear ratio between spindle and position coder in rigid tapping0 : Not used (The gear ratio is set in parameter No.3706.)1 : Used (The gear ratio is set by parameters Nos. 5221 through 5224 and
5231 through 5234.)
CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, G01group G code, reset, etc.)0 : Canceled after rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to “0”.1 : Canceled before rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to “0”.
DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping0 : Invalidated1 : Validated (The override value is set in parameter No.5211.)
PCP Rigid tapping0 : Used as a high–speed peck tapping cycle1 : Not used as a high–speed peck tapping cycle
FHD Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping0 : Invalidated1 : Validated
#7
5201
#6 #5 #4OV3
#3OVU
#2TDR
#1 #0
[Data type] Bit
TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping0 : Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos.
5261 through 5264)1 : Not use a same parameter during cutting and extraction
Parameter Nos. 5261 to 5264: Time constant during cuttingParameter Nos. 5271 to 5274: Time constant during extraction
OVU The increment unit of the override parameter (No.5211) for tool rigidtapping extraction is:0 : 1%1 : 10%
OV3 The spindle speed for tool extraction is specified by program. Overridingbased on this spindle speed is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
4.21PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
142
#7
5202
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0ORI
NOTEWhen at least one of these parameters is set, the powermust be turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
ORI When rigid tapping is started:0 : Spindle orientation is not performed.1 : Spindle orientation is performed.
NOTEThis parameter can be used only for a serial spindle.
#7
5203
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2RFF
#1 #0
[Data type] Bit
RFF The meaning is as follows.0 : The feed–forward control and the fine acceleration/deceleration
between Initial–level and R–points are invalid.Moreover, when the rigid tapping is executed in the advanced previewcontrol mode, the mode is not automatically turned on and off.
1 : The feed–forward control and the fine acceleration/decelerationbetween Initial–level and R–points are effective.Moreover, when the rigid tapping is executed in the advanced previewcontrol mode, the mode is automatically turned on and off.
�
Operation 1Feedforward: InvalidFine acc/dec: Invalid
In case of the parameter RFF(No.5203#2)=0 In case of the parameter RFF(No.5203#2)=1
� �
� �
�
� � �
� �
�
Operation 1Feedforward: InvalidFine acc/dec: Invalid
Operation 3Feedforward: InvalidFine acc/dec: Invalid
Operation 6Feedforward: InvalidFine acc/dec: Invalid
Operation 5Feedforward: InvalidFine acc/dec: Invalid
In–position width:Parameter No.5300
In–position width:Parameter No.5300
In–position width: Parameter No.5300
Operation 4
Z point
R point
Initial point
Operation 1Feedforward: EffectFine acc/dec: Effect
In–position width:Parameter No.5308
In–position width:Parameter No.5300
In–position width: Parameter No.5300
Operation 4
Z point
R point
Initial point
Operation 3Feedforward: InvalidFine acc/dec: Invalid
Operation 5Feedforward: InvalidFine acc/dec: Invalid
Operation 2Feedforward: EffectFine acc/dec: Effect
Operation 6Feedforward: EffectFine acc/dec: Effect
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
143
5210Rigid tapping mode specification M code
[Data type] Byte[Valid data range] 0 to 255
This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode.To set an M code larger than 255, set it to parameter No.5212.
NOTE1 The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when “0” is set.2 To use an M code whose number is greater than 255, Specify
the code number with parameter No.5212.
5211Override value during rigid tapping extraction
[Data type] Byte[Unit of data] 1 % or 10 %
[Valid data range] 0 to 200The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction.
NOTEThe override value is valid when DOV in parameter No.5200#4 is “1”.When OVU (bit 3 of parameter No.5201) is 1, the unit of set datais 10%. An override of up to 200% can be applied to extraction.
5213Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle
[Data type] Word[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–B IS–C UnitMillimeter input 0.001 0.0001 mm
Input in incluse 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767This parameter sets the return or clearance in the peck tapping cycle.
Parameter No.5200 PCP=1(Peck drilling cycle)
Parameter No.5200 PCP=0(High–speed peck drilling cycle)
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
Z point
q
q
q
d
d
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
Z point
q
q
q
d
d
Fig.4.21 (a) High–speed Peck Drilling and Peck Drilling Cycles
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
144
5221Number of spindle gear teeth (first–stage gear)
5222Number of spindle gear teeth (second–stage gear)
5223Number of spindle gear teeth (third–stage gear)
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
When an arbitrary gear ratio is used in rigid tapping, each of theseparameters sets the number of teeth of each spindle gear.
NOTE1 These parameters are enabled when the VGR parameter
(bit 1 of parameter No.5200) is set to 1.2 When a position coder is attached to the spindle, set the
same value for all of parameters No.5221 through No.5223.
5231Number of position coder gear teeth (first–stage gear)
5232Number of position coder gear teeth (second–stage gear)
5233Number of position coder gear teeth (third–stage gear)
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
When an arbitrary gear ratio is used in rigid tapping, each of theseparameters sets the number of teeth of each position coder gear.
NOTEThese parameters are enabled when the VGR parameter(bit 1 of parameter No.5200) is set to 1.When a position coder is attached to the spindle, set thesame value for all of parameters No.5231 through No.5233.When a spindle motor with a built–in position coder is used,a position coder with a resolution of 2048 pulses/rev may beused. In such a case, set the actual number of teeth,multiplied by 2 (for conversion to 4096 pulses/rev).
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
145
5241Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first–stage gear)
5242Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second–stage gear)
5243Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third–stage gear)
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] min–1
[Valid data range] Spindle position coder gear ratio1:1 0 to 74001:2 0 to 99991:4 0 to 99991:8 0 to 9999
Each of these parameters is used to set a maximum spindle speed for eachgear in rigid tapping.
NOTESet the same value for both parameter No.5241 andparameter No.5243 for a one–stage gear system. For atwo–stage gear system, set the same value for parameterNo.5242 and parameter No.5243. Otherwise, P/S alarmNo.200 will be issued.
5261
Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis(first–stage gear)
5262
Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis(second–stage gear)
5263
Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis(third–stage gear)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/deceleration timeconstant for the spindle of each gear and the tapping axis in rigid tapping.
Set the period required to reach each maximum spindle speed (parametersNo.5241 through No.5248). The set time constant, multiplied by the ratioof a specified S value to a maximum spindle speed, is actually used as atime constant.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
146
5271Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (first–stage gear)
5272
Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (second–stage gear)
5273Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (third–stage gear)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/decelerationtime constant for the spindle of each gear and tapping axis in extractionoperation during rigid tapping.
NOTEThese parameters are enabled when the TDR parameter (bit2 of parameter No.5201) is set to 1.
5280
Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (common to all gears)
5281
Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (first–stage gear)
5282
Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (second–stage gear)
5283Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (third–stage gear)
NOTEOnce these parameters have been set, the power must beturned off then back on for the settings to become effective.
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 0.01 s–1
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
Each of these parameters is used to set a position control loop gain for thespindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping. These parameters significantlyaffect the precision of threading. Optimize these parameters as well as theloop gain multipliers by conducting a cutting test.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
147
NOTETo use a varied loop gain on a gear–by–gear basis, setparameter No.5280 to 0, and set a loop gain for each gearin parameters No.5281 through No.5283. The specificationof a loop gain on a gear–by–gear basis is disabled ifparameter No.5280 is set to a value other than 0. In such acase, the value set in parameter No.5280 is used as a loopgain that is common to all the gears.
5291Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1)
5292Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 2)
5293Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 3)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the spindle loop gain multipliers for gears 1 to 4 in the rigid tappingmode. The thread precision depends on the multipliers. Find the mostappropriate multipliers by conducting the cutting test and assign them tothe parameters.
NOTEThese parameters are used for analog spindles.
Loop gain multiplier = 2048 � E/L � α � 1000where;
E : Voltage in the velocity command at 1000 min–1
L : Rotation angle of the spindle per one rotation of the spindlemotor
α : Unit used for the detection
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
148
SpindleMotor
SpindlePositioncoder
1 : 1 : 2
P.C
When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are connectedas shown left, let the variables be as follows:
E = 1.667 (V) (A motor speed of 6000 min–1 corresponds to 10 V.)L = 360� (One rotation of the spindle corresponds to one
rotation of the spindle motor.)α = La/4096
= 720�/4096= 0.17578
La = 720� (= 360� � 2. One rotation of the position coder corresponds to two rotations of the spindle.)
4096 = The number of detected pulses per rotation of the position coder
Gear ratio between the spindle and the position coder1:1 0.08789 degrees. . . . . . . 1:2 0.17578 degrees. . . . . . . 1:4 0.35156 degrees. . . . . . . 1:8 0.70313 degrees. . . . . . .
According to above ratio the loop gain multiplier is calculated as2048 � 1.667/360 � 0.17578 � 1000 = 1667
* When the position coder which is built in a spindle motor sends 512 pulses per rotation, the unit used for the detection, α, is La/2048.
Fig.4.21 (b) Connection among the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder
5300Tapping axis in–position width in rigid tapping
5301Spindle in–position width in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
These parameters are used to set tapping axis and spindle in–positionwidths in rigid tapping.
NOTEIf an excessively large value is specified, the threadingprecision will deteriorate.
5308Width of in–position at R–point of tapping axis in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
The width of in–position at R–point of the tapping axis (Between fromrapid to R–point to the tapping operation) in rigid tapping can be set.When a set value is 0, the width of in–position of the tapping axis in rigidtapping is decided by the setting of No.5300. (Please refer to the figure ofthe explanation of the parameter No. 5203)
Examples
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
149
5310Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit during tappingaxis movement in rigid tapping. A value that falls outside the valid datarange, described above, can be specified in parameter No.5314.
NOTEWhen a high–resolution detector is used, the unit must bemultiplied by 10.
5311Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping.
[Data type] Word type
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviationduring movement in rigidtapping.Limit value = S � 360 � 100 � 1.5 / (60 � G � α)where
S : Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5241 and greater)
G : Loop gain of rigid tapping axis(Setting value of parameter Nos. 5280 and greater)
α : Detection unit
SpindleMotor
SpindlePositioncoder
1 : 1 : 2
P.C
S = 3600G = 3000L = 360 degrees (One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotation)α = La/4096
= 720 degrees/4096= 0.17578 degrees
La = 720 degrees(One position coder rotation requires two spindle rotations (= 360degrees � 2)).
4096 = Detection pulse per position coder rotation
Setting value =
= 6144
3600 � 360 � 100 � 1.5
60 � 3000 � 0.17578
Fig.4.21 (c) Connection Among Spindle Motor, Spindle and Position Coder
(Calculation example)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
150
NOTEThe detection unit is α = La/2048 when the position coderbuilt–in spindle motor uses a position coder of 512 pulsesper revolution.
5312Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed whilethe tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping.
5313Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767
This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed whilethe spindle is stopped in rigid tapping.
5321Spindle backlash in rigid tapping
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
Each of these parameters is used to set a spindle backlash.
5381Rigid tapping return override
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 200
This parameter sets a rigid tapping return override value. When 0 isspecified, override is disabled.
NOTEThis parameter is enabled when the bit 4 (DOV) ofparameter No. 5200 for enabling override at the time ofnormal extraction is set to 1.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
151
5382Rigid tapping return amount α
[Data type] Doubleword
[Unit of data] Input unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter specifies an extra rigid tapping return amount. The tool isreturned by the extra amount α near point R. If rigid tapping has alreadybeen completed, the tool is returned by α.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
152
5460 Axis (linear axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation
5461 Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolarion
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... control axes count
These parameters set control axis numbers of linear and rotary axes toexecute polar interpolation.
5462 Maximum cutting feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation
[Data type] 2–word
Increment system Unit of dataValid data range
Increment system Unit of dataIS–A, IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0, 6 to 240000 0, 6 to 100000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0, 6 to 96000 0, 6 to 48000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 0, 6 to 240000 0, 6 to 100000
This parameter sets the upper limit of the cutting feedrate that is effectiveduring polar coordinate interpolation. If a feedrate greater than themaximum feedrate is specified during polar coordinate interpolation, it isclamped to the feedrate specified by the parameter. When the setting is 0,the feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation is clamped to themaximum cutting feedrate usually specified with parameter 1422.
4.22PARAMETERS OF POLAR COORDINATEINTERPOLATION
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
153
5711 Axis number of moving axis
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number (When 0, compensation is not performed.)
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ...Number of controlled axes
Set the axis numbers of moving axes.
5721 Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving axis
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number (When 0, compensation is not performed.)
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ...Number of controlled axes
Set the axis numbers of compensation axes.
5731 Compensation point number a of moving axis a
5732 Compensation point number a of moving axis b
5733 Compensation point number a of moving axis c
5734 Compensation point number a of moving axis d
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Number (Compensation point numbers in stored pitch errorcompensation)
[Valid data range] 0 to 1023
Set four compensation point for each moving axis.
5761 Compensation corresponding compensation point number a of moving axis
5762 Compensation corresponding compensation point number b of moving axis
5763 Compensation corresponding compensation point number c of moving axis
5764 Compensation corresponding compensation point number d of moving axis
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] –32768 to 32768
Set compensation for each compensation point.
4.23PARAMETERS OF STRAIGHTNESSCOMPENSATION
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
154
#76000
#6 #5SBM
#4HGO
#3 #2 #1MGO
#0G67
[Data type] Bit
G67 If the macro continuous–state call cancel command (G67) is specifiedwhen the macro continuous–state call mode (G66) is not set:0 : P/S alarm No.122 is issued.1 : The specification of G67 is ignored.
MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control isexecuted, a high–speed branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from thestart of the program is:0 : A high–speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the
start of the executed program.1 : A high–speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start
of the program.(The number of sequence numbers, n, is set in parameter No.6092.)
HGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control isexecuted:0 : A high–speed branch is not caused to 30 sequence numbers,
immediately following the point of execution.1 : A high–speed branch is caused to 30 sequence numbers, immediately
before the point of execution.
SBM Custom macro statement0: Not stop the single block1: Stops the single block
NOTEWhen parameter No.3404 #0 NOP = 1, it becomes invalid.
#7CLV6001
#6CCV
#5TCS
#4CRO
#3PV5
#2VFP
#1PRT
#0
[Data type] Bit
PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command0 : Outputs a space1 : Outputs no data
VFP The tape output format to be used for common variables is:0 : Custom macro statement format1 : The same format as for the Power Mate–A, –B, and –C
PV5 Custom macro common variables:0 : Nos. 500 to 599 are output.1 : Nos. 100 to 199 and Nos. 500 to 599 are output.
CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT commond0 : Outputs only LF after data is output1 : Outputs LF and CR after data is output
TCS Custom macro (subprogram)0 : Not called using a T code1 : Called using a T code
4.24PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
155
CCV Custom macro’s common variables Nos. 100 through 1990: Cleared to “vacant” by reset1: Not cleared by reset
CLV Custom macro’s local variables Nos. 1 through 330: Cleared to “vacant” by reset1: Not cleared by reset
#7MUS6003
#6MCY
#5MSB
#4MPR
#3TSE
#2MIN
#1MSK
#0
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt0 : Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)1 : Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)
MIN Custom macro interrupt0 : Performed by interrupting an in–execution block (Custom macro
interrupt type I)1 : Performed after an in–execution block is completed (Custom macro
interrupt type II)
TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT0 : Edge trigger method (Rising edge)1 : Status trigger method
MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code0 : M96/M971 : M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034)
MSB Interrupt program0 : Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro–type interrupt)1 : Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram–
type interrupt)
MCY Custom macro interrupt0 : Not performed during cycle operation1 : Performed during cycle operation
MUS Interrupt–type custom macro0 : Not used1 : Used
#76004
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0NAT
[Data type] Bit
NAT Specification of the results of custom macro functions ATAN and ASIN0 : The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0.
The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0.1 : The result of ATAN is –180 to 0 to 180.0.
The result of ASIN is –90.0 to 0 to 90.0.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
156
#7*76010
#6*6
#5*5
#4*4
#3*3
#2*2
#1*1
#0*0
=76011 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
#76012 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[76013 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
]76014 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
[Data type] Bit
These parameters are used to input/output macro statements.The numeral of a suffix indicates the bit position in a code.*0 to *7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating *.=0 to =7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating =.#0 to #7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating #.[ 0 to [ 7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating [.] 0 to ] 7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating ].0 : Corresponding bit is 01 : Corresponding bit is 1.
6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
These parameters set the custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M codes.
NOTEThese parameters can be used when MPR, #4 of parameterNo.6003, is 1. M96 is used as a valid M code and M97 isused as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of thestate of this parameter.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
157
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010
6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011
6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9012
6053 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9013
6054 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9014
6055 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9015
6056 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9016
6057 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9017
6058 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9018
6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 999
These parameters set the G codes that call the custom macros of programnumbers 9010 through 9019.
NOTESetting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called byG00.
6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001
6072 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9002
6073 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9003
6074 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6075 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005
6076 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9006
6077 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9007
6078 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9008
6079 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9009
[Data type] 2–word
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of programnumbers 9001 through 9009.
NOTESetting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called byM00.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
158
6080 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9020
6081 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9021
6082 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9022
6083 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9023
6084 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9024
6085 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9025
6086 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9026
6087 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9027
6088 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9028
6089 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9029
[Data type] 2–word
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
These parameters set the M codes that call the custom macros of programnumbers 9020 through 9029.
NOTESetting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called byM00.
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 65 (A:41H) to 90 (Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal.Addresses that can be used are as follows:A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, L, M, P, Q, R, S, T, X, Y, Z
NOTESet 0 when no subprogram is called
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
159
When bit 3 (SFM) of parameter No. 3109 is set to 0
(1) Pressing OFFSETSETTING displays page 1 of soft keys.
[OFFSET] [SETTING] [ ] [ ] [(OPRT)]
(2) Pressing the next page soft key ( ) displays page 2 of soft keys.
[MACRO] [ MENU ] [ ] [ ] [(OPRT)]
(3) Pressing the menu soft key displays the menu screen.
When bit 3 (SFM) of parameter No. 3109 is set to 1
(1) Pressing OFFSETSETTING displays page 1 of soft keys.
This screen displays the menu soft key. [OFFSET] [SETTING] [ ] [ MENU ] [(OPRT)]
(2) Pressing the menu soft key displays the menu screen.
6101 Variable number 1 first displayed on the pattern data screen 1
:6110 Variable number 1 first displayed on the pattern data screen 10
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0, 100 to 199, 500 to 699
Variable number first displayed on the pattern data screen selected on themenu screen of the pattern data input function (displayed on the screen foreach multiple of 8). When 0 is specified, a specification of 500 is assumed.
Example: Macro variables starting with No. 508 are displayed if 508 isset in parameter No. 6101, and pattern 1 is selected on thepattern data menu screen.
4.25PARAMETERS OFPATTERN DATA INPUT
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
160
#76131
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1EOA
#0OAD
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit axis
OAD The function for positioning by optimum acceleration is:0 : Disabled.1 : Disabled.
EOA For a movement along the PMC axis, the function for positioning byoptimum acceleration is:0 : Disabled.1 : Disabled.
NOTE1 The OAD parameter must also be set to “1”.2 The function for positioning by optimum acceleration is
enabled regardless of whether bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No.8002 is 1 or 0.
#76132
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0ILG
[Data type] Bit
ILG For the function for positioning by optimum acceleration, loop gainswitching is:0 : Performed. (Parameter Nos. 6181 to 6187 are used.)1 : Not performed. (Parameter No. 1825 is used.)
6136 Distance D1 to the first stage
6137 Distance D2 to the second stage
6138 Distance D3 to the third stage
[Data type] Two–word axis
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
4.26PARAMETERS OF POSITIONING BYOPTIMUMACCELERATION
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
161
Specify the positioning distance when the function for positioning byoptimum acceleration is used. (To be set for each axis)
NOTE1 The set values must satisfy: D1 < D2 < D32 Switching is possible through up to four stages. Set up D3
= 99999999, for example, if the first to third stages are to beused.
3 If both this parameter and parameters 6141 to 6156 are setup, this parameter is used.
6141 Distance D1 to the first stage (for metric input or rotation axis)
6142 Distance D2 to the second stage (for metric input or rotation axis)
6143 Distance D3 to the third stage (for metric input or rotation axis)
6144 Distance D4 to the fourth stage (for metric input or rotation axis)
6145 Distance D5 to the fifth stage (for metric input or rotation axis)
6146 Distance D6 to the sixth stage (for metric input or rotation axis)
6151 Distance D1 to the first stage (for inch input)
6152 Distance D2 to the second stage (for inch input)
6153 Distance D2 to the second stage (for inch input)
6154 Distance D4 to the fourth stage (for inch input)
6155 Distance D5 to the fifth stage (for inch input)
6156 Distance D6 to the sixth stage (for inch input)
[Data type] Two–word
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric inputRotation axis
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm, degMetric input
Rotation axis0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm, deg
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Specify the positioning distance when the function for positioning byoptimum acceleration is used. (These parameters are common to allaxes.)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
162
NOTE1 The set values must satisfy: D1 < D2 < D3 < D4 < D5 < D6
< D72 Switching is possible through up to seven stages. Set up D4
= 99999999, for example, if the first to fourth stages are tobe used.
3 These parameters specify a distance for the respectiveaxes. They do not specify a block length. If G00 X10. Z10.;is issued, for example, the block length is 14.142 mm, but thedistance is decided on by comparing these parameters witha value of 10.000 mm issued to each axis.
6161 First–stage rapid traverse rate
6162 Second–stage rapid traverse rate
6163 Third–stage rapid traverse rate
6164 Fourth–stage rapid traverse time constant
6165 Fifth–stage rapid traverse time constant
6166 Sixth–stage rapid traverse time constant
6167 Seventh–stage rapid traverse time constant
[Data type] Two–word axis
Increment system Unit of data Valid data range
Metric input 1mm/min 30 to 240000
Inch input 0.1inch/min 30 to 96000
Each stage rapid traverse time constant
6171 First–stage rapid traverse time constant
6172 Second–stage rapid traverse time constant
6173 Third–stage rapid traverse time constant
6174 Third–stage rapid traverse time constant
6175 Fifth–stage rapid traverse time constant
6176 Sixth–stage rapid traverse time constant
6177 Seventh–stage rapid traverse time constant
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 8 to 4000
Each stage rapid traverse time constant
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
163
6181 First–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain
6182 Second–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain
6183 Third–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain
6184 Fourth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain
6185 Fifth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain
6186 Sixth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain
6187 Seventh–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] 0.01 sec–1
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999
Each stage rapid traverse servo loop gainIf a specified value is 0, parameter No. 1825 is used as a servo loop gain.
6191 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for first–stage rapidtraverse during positioning by optimum acceleration
6192 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for second–stagerapid traverse during positioning by optimum acceleration
6193 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for third–stage rapidtraverse during positioning by optimum acceleration
6194 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for fourth–stagerapid traverse during positioning by optimum acceleration
6195 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for fifth–stage rapidtraverse during positioning by optimum acceleration
6196 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for sixth–stage rapidtraverse during positioning by optimum acceleration
6197 Time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for seventh–stagerapid traverse during positioning by optimum acceleration
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 8 to 512
These parameters set time constant T2 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for the rapid traverse in each stage of positioning by optimumacceleration for each axis.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
164
#7SKF
6200
#6SRE
SRE
#5SLS
SLS
#4 #3 #2 #1SK0
#0GSK
[Data type] Bit
GSK In skip cutting (G31), the skip signal SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) is:0 : Not used as a skip signal.1 : Used as a skip signal.
SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the stateof the skip signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals (bits of 2, 3, 4 X004).0 : Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1.1 : Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0.
SLS While the high–speed skip signals are input, the high–speed skip signalsare :0 : Not available1 : Available
NOTEThe following parameters must be set, if the aboveparameter is set to ”1” and the high–speed skip signals areavailable. No.8731, 8732, 8733
SRE In case the status trigger method for high–speed skip signals is selected(bit 6 of No.6209 = 0) :0 : The signal is considered to be input at the status ”1”.1 : The signal is considered to be input at the status ”0”.
NOTEThe skip signals (SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP4) are availableirrespective of whether this parameter is set. If the parameterIGX (bit 4 of No.6201) is set to 1, these signals are notavailable.
SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skipcommand0 : Disabled1 : Enabled
NOTEIn the high–speed response mode, dry run is enabled.
4.27PARAMETERS OFSKIP FUNCTION
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
165
#7
6201
#6 #5 #4IGX
IGX
#3 #2
TSE
#1SEB
SEB
#0SEA
SEA
[Data type] Bit
SEA When a high speed skip signal turns on while the skip function is used,acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are:0 : Ignored in calculation of skip–position.1 : Considered and compensated in calculation of skip–position. (type
A).
SEB When a high–speed skip signal turns on while the skip function is used,acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are:0 : Ignored in calculation of skip–position.1 : Considered and compensated in calculation of skip–position (type B).
TSE When the torque limit skip (G31P98) is issued to cause a skip, the tool is:0 : Reversed through the amount of servo error.1 : Not reversed through the amount of servo error.
NOTEThe torque limit skip function can be used only in thehigh–speed response mode.
IGX When the high–speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP4, andSKIPP are:0 : Enabled as skip signals.1 : Disabled as skip signals.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
166
#7
6202
#6
1S7
#5
1S6
#4
1S5
#31S4
1S4
#21S3
1S3
#11S2
1S2
#01S1
1S11S8
62032S7 2S6 2S5
2S4
2S4
2S3
2S3
2S2
2S2
2S1
2S12S8
62043S7 3S6 3S5
3S4
3S4
3S3
3S3
3S2
3S2
3S1
3S13S8
62054S7 4S6 4S5
4S4
4S4
4S3
4S3
4S2
4S2
4S1
4S14S8
6206DS7 DS6 DS5
DS4
DS4
DS3
DS3
DS2
DS2
DS1
DS1DS8
62705S7 5S6 5S5 5S4 5S3 5S2 5S15S8
62716S7 6S6 6S5 6S4 6S3 6S2 6S16S8
62727S7 7S6 7S5 7S4 7S3 7S2 7S17S8
62738S7 8S6 8S5 8S4 8S3 8S2 8S18S8
[Data type] Bit
1S1 to 1S8, 2S1 to 2S8, 3S1 to 3S8, 4S1 to 4S8, 5S1 to 5S8, 6S1 to 6S8, 7S1 to 7S8, 8S1 to 8S8, DS1 to DS8:Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, orG31P1 to G31P8) and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q8) areissued with the multi–step skip function.The following table shows the correspondence among the bits, inputsignals, and commands.The settings of the bits have the following meanings:0 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled.1 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled.
NOTEThe skip command (G31 P5 to G31 P8) and the dwellcommand (G04 Q5 to G04 Q8) can not be specified in PowerMate i–D.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
167
Multi–step skip functionCommand
Input signal
G31G31P1G04Q1
G31P2G04Q2
G31P3G04Q3
G31P4G04Q4
G31P5G04Q5
G31P6G04Q6
G31P7G04Q7
G31P8G04Q8
G04G04Q1
~Q8
SKIP/DI30 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 5S1 6S1 7S1 8S1 DS1
SKIP2/DI31 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 5S2 6S2 7S2 8S2 DS2
SKIP3/DI32 1S3 2S3 3S3 4S3 5S3 6S3 7S3 8S3 DS3
SKIP4/DI33 1S4 2S4 3S4 4S4 5S4 6S4 7S4 8S4 DS4
DI34 1S5 2S5 3S5 4S5 5S5 6S5 7S5 8S5 DS5
DI35 1S6 2S6 3S6 4S6 5S6 6S6 7S6 8S6 DS6
DI36 1S7 2S7 3S7 4S7 5S7 6S7 7S7 8S7 DS7
DI37 1S8 2S8 3S8 4S8 5S8 6S8 7S8 8S8 DS8
#7SKRT
6209
#6SEDG
SEDG
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0DSK
SKRT
[Data type] Bit
DSK 0 : Disables skip signal SKIPP from the PMC for the dwell skip function.1 : Enables skip signal SKIPP from the PMC for the dwell skip function.
SEDG The status trigger method for high–speed skip signals in high–speed skipfunction0 : Is available1 : Is not available (Only the edge trigger is available.)
In case that the status trigger method is not available, the skip operation isnot performed, even if the skip signal is enabled before the block of thehigh–speed skip starts executing.
SKRT In case the traveling distance from skip signal in the high–speed skip isshorter than the decelerating distance,0 : The axis comes back to the stopped position after the axis passes by
the stopped position once.1 : The axis stops at the position where the axis can stop.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
168
6210
Size of buffer 1 (system variable 9000 to 9099)
6211
Size of buffer 2 (system variable 9100 to 9199)
6212
Size of buffer 3 (system variable 9200 to 9299)
6213
Size of buffer 4 (system variable 9300 to 9399)
6214
Size of buffer 5 (system variable 9400 to 9499)
6215
Size of buffer 6 (system variable 9500 to 9599)
6216
Size of buffer 7 (system variable 9600 to 9699)
6217
Size of buffer 8 (system variable 9700 to 9799)
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 100
Specify the size of a buffer for storing the data that is measured with thehigh–speed skip signal–based measurement function. (This buffer is aring buffer.)If a value out of the valid data range is specified for a parameter, theparameter is invalid.
NOTEThe change to this setting takes effect next time the poweris turned on.
#7
6218
#6
DI6
#5
DI5
#4
DI4
#3
DI3
#2
DI2
#1
DI1
#0
DI0DI7
[Data type] Bit
DIn When the high–speed skip signal is input, the nth (system variables 9n00to 9n99) buffer is loaded with:0 : Absolute coordinates1 : Distance moved through since the last signal input
NOTEThe change to this setting takes effect next time the poweris turned on.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
169
6220
High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 1
6221
High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 2
6222
High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 3
6223
High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 4
6224
High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 5
6225
High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 6
6226
High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 7
6227
High–speed skip signal DI3n valid for buffer 8
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 8 (n + 1 is to be specified)
The coordinates at the input of a high–speed skip signal specified in theseparameters are stored to the respective buffers.If a value out of the valid data range is specified for a parameter, theparameter is invalid.
NOTEThe change to this setting takes effect next time the poweris turned on.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
170
6230
Axis number of an axis assigned to buffer 1
6231
Axis number of an axis assigned to buffer 2
6232
Axis number of an axis assigned to buffer 3
6233
Axis number of an axis assigned to buffer 4
6234
Axis number of an axis assigned to buffer 5
6235
Axis number of an axis assigned to buffer 6
6236
Axis number of an axis assigned to buffer 7
6237
Axis number of an axis assigned to buffer 8
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 8
If high–speed skip signals specified in parameters 6220 to 6227 are input,the coordinates of the axes specified in these parameters are stored to therespective buffers.If a value out of the valid data range is specified for a parameter, theparameter is invalid.
NOTEThe change to this setting takes effect next time the poweris turned on.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
171
6240
Compensation value for signal 1
6241
Compensation value for signal 2
6242
Compensation value for signal 3
6243
Compensation value for signal 4
6244
Compensation value for signal 5
6245
Compensation value for signal 6
6246
Compensation value for signal 7
6247
Compensation value for signal 8
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] �s
[Valid data range] 0 to 8000
A signal delay that may occur in some sensors for the high–speed skipsignal–based measurement function is set up as a compensation value.If a value out of the valid data range is specified for a parameter, theparameter is invalid.
NOTEThe change to this setting takes effect next time the poweris turned on.
#7
8731
#6
EPMC6
#5
EPMC5
#4
EPMC4
#3
EPMC3
#2
EPMC2
#1
EPMC1
#0
EPMC0EPMC7
[Data type] Bit
EPMCn The signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is0 : Used for high–speed skip function or measuring function by using
high–speed skip signal1 : Used for interrupt type PMC
NOTEThis parameter must be set to 0, when the above functionsare not used.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
172
#7
8732
#6
UPEG6
#5
UPEG5
#4
UPEG4
#3
UPEG3
#2
UPEG2
#1
UPEG1
#0
UPEG0UPEG7
[Data type] Bit
UPEGn The rising edge (0 → 1) of the signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is :0 : Not used for interrupt type PMC or high–speed skip signal.1 : Used for interrupt type PMC or high–speed skip signal.
#7
8733
#6
DWEG6
#5
DWEG5
#4
DWEG4
#3
DWEG3
#2
DWEG2
#1
DWEG1
#0
DWEG0DWEG7
[Data type] Bit
DWEGn The falling edge (1 → 0) of the signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is0 : Not used for interrupt type PMC or high–speed skip signal1 : Used for interrupt type PMC or high–speed skip signal.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
173
#76300
#6 #5 #4ESR
#3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
ESR External program number search0 : Disabled1 : Enabled
#7DSG6550
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
DSG The soft keys for the picture display function are:0 : Not displayed.1 : Displayed.
4.28PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
4.29PARAMETERS OF PICTURE DISPLAY
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
174
#7NCT6700
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0PCM
[Data type] Bit
PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number ofmachined parts0 : M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.67101 : Only M code specified by parameter No.6710
NCT 0 : Displays the operating time and the number of parts.1 : Does not display the operating time and the number of parts.
6710M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of ma-chined parts
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 255 except 98 and 99
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts arecounted (+1) when the M code set is executed.
NOTESet value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted forM00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set.
6711 Number of machined parts
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One piece
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the totalnumber of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified byparameter No.6710 is executed.
NOTEThe number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
4.30PARAMETERS OF DISPLAYINGOPERATION TIME AND NUMBER OF PARTS
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
175
6712 Total number of machined parts
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One piece
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, oran M code specified by parameter No.6710 is executed.
NOTEThe number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6713 Number of required parts
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] One piece
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF is output to PMC when the number ofmachined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of partsis regarded as infinity when the number of required parts is zero. ThePRTSF signal is then not output.
6750 Integrated value of power–on period
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of power–on period.
6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) I
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 60000
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
176
6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) II
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automaticoperation (neither stop nor hold time included).
6753 Integrated value of cutting time I
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One ms
[Valid data range] 1 to 60000
6754 Integrated value of cutting time II
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that isperformed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circularinterpolation (G02 or G03).
6755Integrated value of general–purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON)ON time I
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 60000
6756Integrated value of general–purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON)ON time II
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input signalTMRON from PMC is on.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
177
6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) I
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 60000
6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) II
This parameter can be set at “Setting screen”.
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] One minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neitherstop nor hold state included). The operation time is automatically presetto 0 during the power–on sequence and the cycle start from the reset state.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
178
#76901
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0IGP
[Data type] Bit
IGP During follow–up for the absolute position detector, position switchsignals are:0 : Output1 : Not output
6910 Axis corresponding to the first position switch
6911 Axis corresponding to the second position switch
6912 Axis corresponding to the third position switch
6913 Axis corresponding to the fourth position switch
6914 Axis corresponding to the fifth position switch
6915 Axis corresponding to the sixth position switch
6916 Axis corresponding to the seventh position switch
6917 Axis corresponding to the eighth position switch
6918 Axis corresponding to the ninth position switch
6919 Axis corresponding to the tenth position switch
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0, 1, 2, 3, . . . , control axis count
These parameters specify the control–axes numbers corresponding to thefirst through tenth position switch functions. A corresponding positionswitch signal is output to PMC when the machine coordinate value of acorresponding axis is within the range that is set using a parameter.
NOTESet 0 for those position switch numbers that are not to beused.
4.31PARAMETERS OF POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
179
6930 Maximum operation range of the first position switch
6931 Maximum operation range of the second position switch
6932 Maximum operation range of the third position switch
6933 Maximum operation range of the fourth position switch
6934 Maximum operation range of the fifth position switch
6935 Maximum operation range of the sixth position switch
6936 Maximum operation range of the seventh position switch
6937 Maximum operation range of the eighth position switch
6938 Maximum operation range of the ninth position switch
6939 Maximum operation range of the tenth position switch
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data]Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
These parameters set the maximum operation range of the first throughtenth position switches.
6950 Minimum operation range of the first position switch
6951 Minimum operation range of the second position switch
6952 Minimum operation range of the third position switch
6953 Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch
6954 Minimum operation range of the fifth position switch
6955 Minimum operation range of the sixth position switch
6956 Minimum operation range of the seventh position switch
6957 Minimum operation range of the eighth position switch
6958 Minimum operation range of the ninth position switch
6959 Minimum operation range of the tenth position switch
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data]Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
These parameters set the minimum operation range of the first throughtenth position switches.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
180
#77100
#6 #5 #4HPF
#3HCL
#2IHD
#1THD
#0
[Data type] Bit
THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode0 : Invalid1 : Valid
IHD The travel increment for manual handle interrupt is:0 : Output unit, and acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
disabled.1 : Input unit, and acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
enabled.
HCL The clearing of handle interruption amount display by soft key [CAN]operation is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
HPF When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued,0 : The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses
corresponding to the excess are ignored. (The graduations of themanual pulse generator may not agree with the distance the machinehas traveled.)
1 : The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulsescorresponding to the excess are not ignored, but stored in the CNC. (Ifthe rotation of the manual pulse generator is stopped, the machinemoves by the distance corresponding to the pulses preserved in theCNC, then stops.)
#77101
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0IOL
[Data type] Bit
IOL 0 : As a manual pulse generator interface for manual handle feed, themanual pulse generator interface on the base PCB is used.
1 : As a manual pulse generator interface for manual handle feed, themanual pulse generator interface of the machine operator’s panelinterface for I/O Link is used.
#77102
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0HNGx
[Data type] Bit axis
HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator0 : Same in direction1 : Reverse in direction
4.32PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED, HANDLE INTERRUPTIONDIRECTION
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
181
#77104
#6NJH
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
NJH Manual handle feed in the jog mode and incremental feed in the manualhandle feed mode are:0 : Enabled.1 : Disabled.
When NJH is set to 1 When NJH is set to 0
Jog feedmode
Manualhandle feed
mode
Jog feedmode
Manualhandle feed
mode
Jog feed � � � �
Manual handlefeed
� � � �
Incrementalfeed
� � � �
NOTEIf this bit is 1 when you to want perform butt–type referenceposition setting for more than one axis continuously, you donot need to turn the power off and on again each timereference position setting is performed each axis. Whenbutt–type reference position setting is performed for an axis,alarm 000 is issued, but butt–type reference position settingcan be performed for another axis. (In this case, however,if you reset the machine or switch from one mode to another,you must turn the power off and on again before you canperform butt–type reference position setting for anotheraxis.)
#77105
#6 #5 #4HDS
#3 #2 #1HXS
#0
[Data type] Bit
HXS The assignment system of the I/O Link manual handle is:0 : This system fixes the order (system A).
Up to three manual pulse generators can be used in ascending order ofgroup numbers with I/O Link connection.
1 : This system sets the order with the parameter (system B).It is possible to use up to three manual pulse generators with arbitrarygroup numbers set in parameters No. 7120 to No. 7122 regardless ofthe connection order.
HDS When parameters No. 7120 to No. 7122, which assign I/O Link manualpulse generators to the X signal addresses of arbitrary groups, is set, alarm0 (power–off request):0 : Occurs.1 : Does not occur.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
182
NOTEHDS of this parameter is valid only when system B isselected by setting bit 1 (HXS) of parameter No. 7105 to 1.
7110 Number of manual pulse generators used
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2 (up to 3 if a manual pulse generators on the I/O Link machineoperator’s panel interface are used in the Power Mate i–H)
This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators.
7113 Manual handle feed magnification m
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] One time
[Valid data range] 1 to 127
This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feedmovement selection signal MP2 is set to 1.
7114 Manual handle feed magnification n
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] One time
[Valid data range] 1 to 1000
This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feedmovement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are set to 1.
Movement selection signal Movement
(Manual handle feed)MP2 MP1
(Manual handle feed)
0 0 Least input increment�1
0 1 Least input increment�10
1 0 Least input increment�m
0 1 Least input increment�n
7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed
[Data type] 2–Word
[Unit of data] Pulses
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
If manual handle feed is specified such that the rapid traverse rate will beexceeded momentarily, those pulses received from the manual pulsegenerator that exceed the rapid traverse rate are accumulated rather thancanceled. This parameter sets the maximum number of pulses which canbe accumulated in such a case.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
183
NOTE1 If the specification of manual handle feed is such that the
rapid traverse rate will be exceeded, for example, when themanual pulse generator is rotated at high speed with a largemagnification such as �100, the axial feedrate is clampedat the rapid traverse rate and those pulses received from themanual pulse generator that exceed the rapid traverse rateare ignored. In such a case, therefore, the scale on themanual pulse generator may differ from the actual amountof travel. If such a difference is not acceptable, thisparameter can be set to temporarily accumulate the excesspulses in the CNC, rather than ignoring them, up to thespecified maximum (pulses in excess of the set maximumare ignored). The accumulated pulses are output andconverted to a move command once the feedrate falls belowthe rapid traverse rate by reducing the rotational speed ofthe manual pulse generator or stopping its rotationaltogether. Note, however, that if the maximum number ofpulses to be accumulated is too large, stopping the rotationof the manual pulse generator does not stop feeding until thetool moves by an amount corresponding to the pulsesaccumulated in the CNC.
2 This parameter is valid when bit 4 (HPF) of parameter No.7100 is set to 0.
7120 X address to which the first manual pulse generator is assigned
7121 X address to which the second manual pulse generator is assigned
7122 X address to which the third manual pulse generator is assigned
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 128
NOTE1 The PMC X address to assign a manual pulse generator can
be gotten by adding ”the top address of the I/O Linkconnection group” and ”the offset address of the manualpulse generator from the top of the module”.The offset address of a manual pulse generator from the topof module is different for each device. Refer to the hardwareconnection manual related with it.
2 If the address to which a manual pulse generator cannot beassigned is specified by the parameter, an axis cannot bemoved by a manual pulse generator.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
184
7181 First withdrawal distance in reference position setting with mechanical stopper
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data]Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, thisparameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performedafter the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopperto the withdrawal point).
NOTESet the same direction as that set in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameterNo. 1006. Cycle operation cannot be started if the oppositedirection is set.
7182 Second withdrawal distance in reference position setting with mechanical stopper
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data]Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, thisparameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performedafter the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopperto the withdrawal point).
NOTESet the same direction as that set in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameterNo. 1006. Cycle operation cannot be started if the oppositedirection is set.
4.33PARAMETERS OFREFERENCEPOSITION SETTINGWITH MECHANICALSTOPPER
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
185
7183 First butting feedrate in reference position setting with mechanical stopper
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data and valid range]
Increment system Unit of dataValid data range
Increment system Unit of dataIS–A, IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 6000 30 to 4800
When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, thisparameter sets the feedrate first used to hit the stopper on an axis.
7184 Second butting feedrate in reference position setting with mechanical stopper
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data and valid range]
Increment system Unit of dataValid data range
Increment system Unit of dataIS–A, IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 6000 30 to 4800
When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, thisparameter sets the feedrate used to hit the stopper on an axis for a secondtime.
7185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting operations) inreference position setting with mechanical stopper
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data and valid range]
Increment system Unit of dataValid data range
Increment system Unit of dataIS–A, IS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 6000 30 to 4800
When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, thisparameter sets the feedrate used for withdrawal along an axis after themechanical stopper has been hit.
7186 Torque limit value in reference position setting with mechanical stopper
[Data type] Byte axes
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 to 100
This parameter sets a torque limit value in reference position setting withmechanical stopper
NOTEWhen 0 is set in this parameter, 100% is assumed.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
186
#77200
#6OP7
#5OP6
#4OP5
#3OP4
#2OP3
#1OP2
#0OP1
[Data type] Bit
OP1 Mode selection on software operator’s panel0 : Not performed1 : Performed
OP2 JOG feed axis select and JOG rapid traverse buttons on softwareoperator’s panel0 : Not performed1 : Performed
OP3 Manual pulse generator’s axis select and manual pulse generator’smagnification switches on software operator’s panel0 : Not performed1 : Performed
OP4 JOG speed override and rapid traverse override switches on softwareoperator’s panel0 : Not performed1 : Performed
OP5 Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, and dry run switches onsoftware operator’s panel0 : Not performed1 : Performed
OP6 Protect key on software operator’s panel0 : Not performed1 : Performed
OP7 Feed hold on software operator’s panel0 : Not performed1 : Performed
#7NS07202
#6NS2
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
NS2 0 : Uses the software operator’s panel general–purpose switches.1 : Does not use the software operator’s panel general–purpose switches.
NS0 0 : Uses the software operator’s panel.1 : Does not use the software operator’s panel.
4.34PARAMETERS OF SOFTWAREOPERATOR’S PANEL
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
187
7210 PLSKY1
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9This parameter specifies a key value used with the + direction key for thefirst jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel.
7211 MNSKY1
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9This parameter specifies a key value used with the –direction key for thefirst jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel.
7212 PLSKY2
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9This parameter specifies a key value used with the + direction key for thesecond jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel.
7213 MNSKY2
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9This parameter specifies a key value used with the –direction key for thesecond jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel.
7214 PLSKY3
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9This parameter specifies a key value used with the + direction key for thethird jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel.
7215 MNSKY3
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9This parameter specifies a key value used with the –direction key for thethird jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
188
7216 PLSKY4
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9This parameter specifies a key value used with the + direction key for thefourth jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel.
7217 MNSKY4
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9This parameter specifies a key value used with the –direction key for thefourth jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel.
7220 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator’s panel
7283 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator’s panel
[Data type] Byte
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
189
OPERATOR’S PANEL O1234 N5678
SIGNAL1 : OFF ONSIGNAL2 : OFF ONSIGNAL3 : OFF ONSIGNAL4 : OFF ONSIGNAL5 : OFF ONSIGNAL6 : OFF ONSIGNAL7 : OFF ONSIGNAL8 : OFF ON
These names are set using character codes that are displayed in parameterNos. 7220 to 7283.
Parameter No.7220:Sets the character code (083) corresponding to S of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.7221:Sets the character code (073) corresponding to I of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.7222:Sets the character code (071) corresponding to G of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.7223:Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.7224:Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.7225:Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.7226:Sets the character code (032) corresponding to (space) of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter No.7227:Sets the character code (049) corresponding to 1 of SIGNAL 1.
Parameter Nos. 7228 to 7235:Set the character codes of SIGNAL 2 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7236 to 7243:Set the character codes of SIGNAL 3 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7244 to 7251:Set the character codes of SIGNAL 4 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7252 to 7259:Set the character codes of SIGNAL 5 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7260 to 7267:Set the character codes of SIGNAL 6 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7268 to 7275:Set the character codes of SIGNAL 7 shown in the figure above.
Parameter Nos. 7276 to 7283:Set the character codes of SIGNAL 8 shown in the figure above.
The character codes are shown in Appendix A CHARACTER CODELIST.
ExampleThese parameters set thenames of thegeneral–purpose switches(SIGNAL 1 throughSIGNAL 8) on thesoftware operator’s panelas described below.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
190
7410 M–code 1 for direct signal output function
7411 M–code 2 for direct signal output function
7412 M–code 3 for direct signal output function
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] The number of the M–code for direct signal output is specified. The M–code with special meaning like below are not used.M00,M01,M02,M30,M98,M99,M800 to M999 and M90000000 toM99999999These M–codes can be used only in high response mode.
7415 Output address 1 for M–code for direct signal output function
7416 Output address 2 for M–code for direct signal output function
7417 Output address 3 for M–code for direct signal output function
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] The Y address of PMC to output direct signals are specified.From 1000 to 1002 (Y address of built–in I/O)It is not necessary to specify the character ”Y”. Only numerical valueshould be set here. The correspondence between the M–code and thedirect signals are decided like below.No.7415 corresponds to No.7410.No.7416 corresponds to No.7411.No.7417 corresponds to No.7412.
NOTE1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.2 These parameters are effective when direct signal output
function is used in high response mode.
� Parameters related to thedirect M–code signaloutput function
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
191
7420 Number of output bits 1 for direct signal output
7421 Number of output bits 2 for direct signal output
7422 Number of output bits 3 for direct signal output
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1–8Set the number of output bits on Y address.Ex) When the output address is Y1001 and the number of output bits is3, then Y1001#0 to #2 are used for direct signal output.The correspondence between M–code and these parameters are shownbelow.No.7420 corresponds to No.7410No.7421 corresponds to No.7411No.7422 corresponds to No.7412If this parameter is set to ”0”, the M–code corresponded to the parameteris not used for direct signal output.
CAUTION1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued. These parameters areeffective only in case of direct signal output function.
2 As the output signals on the built–in I/O are used, theaddress and the bit of the direct signal must not overlap withthe other usage of PMC application. The signals that arealready used for other purpose cannot be assigned here.
3 The bits other than the direct signal in the address assignedfor the direct signal must not be used for other usage.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
192
#7EXH7670
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
EXH 0 : Sets an axis and magnification for external pulse input by using DIsignals
1 : Sets an axis and magnification for external pulse input by usingparameters
7681 Setting 1 of the ratio of an axis move amount to external pulses (M)
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] M = 1 to 255
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 7 (EXH) of parameterNo.7670 is set to 1.
7682 Setting 2 of the ratio of an axis move amount to external pulses (N)
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] N = 1 to 1000
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 7 (EXH) of parameterNo.7670 is set to 1.
#77701
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2SM3
#1SM2
#0SM1
SM3 SM2 SM1 Number of sampling operations
0 0 0 4
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 8
1 0 0 16
1 0 1 4
1 1 0 4
1 1 1 4
Specify the number of sampling operations for input pulse smoothing.
4.35PARAMETERS OF THE EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
193
7710 Setting of an axis number for movement along an axis by external pulses
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1, 2, ..., number of controlled axesIf 0 is specified, no movement along an axis is made by external pulses.
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 7 (EXH) of parameterNo.7670 is set to 1.
7712Time constant of acceleration/deceleration for an external pulse–based axis (exponential acceleration/deceleration)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
7713 FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration for an external pulse–based axis
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Unit of dataRange of valid data
Unit of dataIS–B IS–C
deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
NOTEWhen the 2–path Power Mate i–D is used, the external pulseinput function can be used only with the first path side.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
194
#7SKE8001
#6AUX
#5NCC
#4 #3RDE
#2OVE
#1 #0MLE
[Data type] Bit
MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC–controlledaxes0 : Valid1 : Invalid
OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
(1) Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7(2) Override cancellation signal OVC(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2(4) Dry run signal DRN(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RT
1: Signals specific to the PMC(1) Feedrate override signals *FV0E to *FV7E(2) Override cancellation signal OVCE(3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E(4) Dry run signal DRNE(5) Rapid traverse selection signal RTE
RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control0 : Invalid1 : Valid
NCC When a travel command is issued for a PMC–controlled axis (selected bya controlled–axis selection signal) according to the program:0 : P/S alarm 139 is issued while the PMC controls the axis with an axis
control command. While the PMC does not control the axis, a CNCcommand is enabled.
1 : P/S alarm 139 is issued unconditionally.
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 7 (EA2) of parameterNo.8003 is set to 0.
AUX The number of bytes for the code of an auxiliary function (12H) commandto be output is0 : 1 (0 to 255)1 : 2 (0 to 65535)
SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC0 : Uses the same signal SKIP as CNC.1 : Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP used by the PMC.
4.36PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
195
#7FR28002
#6FR1
#5PF2
#4PF1
#3F10
#2SUE
#1DWE
#0RPD
[Data type] Bit
RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC–controlled axes0 : Feedrate specified with parameter No.14201 : Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command
DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axiscontrol when the increment system is IS–C0 : 1 ms1 : 0.1 ms
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 7 (EA2) of parameterNo.8003 is set to 0.
SUE Whether acceleration/deceleration is performed for an axis that issynchronized with external pulses, for external pulse synchronizationcommands in PMC axis control0 : Performed (exponential acceleration/deceleration)1 : Not performed
F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axiscontrol
F10 Millimeter input Inch input0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min
1 10 mm/min 0.1 inch/min
PF1, PF2 Set the the feedrate unit of feed per minute in PMC axis control
PF2 PF1 Feedrate unit0 0 1/1
0 1 1/10
1 0 1/100
1 1 1/1000
FR1, FR2 Set the feedrate unit for feed per rotation for an axis controlled by thePMC.
FR2 FR1 Millimeter input Inch input0 0
0.0001 mm/rev 0.000001 inch/rev1 1
0.0001 mm/rev 0.000001 inch/rev
0 1 0.001 mm/rev 0.00001 inch/rev
1 0 0.01 mm/rev 0.0001 inch/rev
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
196
#7
8003
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0PIM
PIMEA2
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
PIM When only the axes controlled by the PMC are used, the linear axis is:0: Influenced by inch/millimeter input.1: Not influenced by inch/millimeter input.
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 7 (EA2) of parameterNo.8003 is set to 0.
EA2 PMC axis control complies to:0: Conventional specification1: New specification (this setting is to be used only when the
multiple–path control function is used.)
#78004
#6NCI
#5DSL
#4 #3 #2JFM
#1NMT
#0CMV
[Data type] Bit
CMV When a move command and auxiliary function are specified from theCNC, and the system is awaiting the auxiliary function completion signalafter completion of the specified axis movement:0 : An alarm (No.130) is issued when an axis control command is issued
from the PMC for the same axis.1 : An axis control command, when issued from the PMC for the same
axis, is executed.
NMT When a command is specified from the CNC for the axis on which the toolis moving according to axis control specification from the PMC:0 : P/S alarm No.130 is issued.1 : The command is executed without issuing an alarm, provided the
command does not involve a movement on the axis.
JFM This parameter sets the units used to specify feedrate data whencontinuous feed is specified in axis control by the PMC.
Increment system JFM Millimeter input Inch input Rotation axis
IS–A0 10 mm/min 0.1 inch/min 0.0023 min–1
IS–A1 2000 mm/min 20.0 inch/min 0.46 min–1
IS–B0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min 0.00023 min–1
IS–B1 200 mm/min 2.00 inch/min 0.046 min–1
IS–C0 0.1 mm/min 0.001 inch/min 0.000023 min–1
IS–C1 20 mm/min 0.200 inch/min 0.0046 min–1
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
197
DSL If the selection of an axis is changed when PMC axis selection is disabled:0 : P/S alarm No.139 is issued.1 : The change is valid, and no alarm is issued for an unspecified system.
NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is:0 : Performed.1 : Not performed.
NOTEBit 0 (CMV), bit 1 (NMT), and bit 5 (DSL) of this parameteris valid when bit 7 (EA2) of parameter No. 8003 is set to 0.
#78005
#6 #5 #4 #3DRR
#2R10
#1 #0
[Data type] Bit
R10 When the RPD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.8002) is set to 1, the unitfor specifying a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is:0 : 1 mm/min.1 : 10 mm/min.
DRR For cutting feed per rotation in PMC axis control, the dry run function is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
NOTEBit 2 (R10) and bit 3 (DRR) of this parameter is valid whenbit 7 (EA2) of parameter No. 8003 is set to 0.
#78006
#6 #5 #4 #3EDL
#2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
EDL For PMC axis control, axis direction–specific interlock is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
NOTEThis parameter is valid when bit 7 (EA2) of parameter No.8003 is set to 0.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
198
#78009
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1INOV
#0IOVC
[Data type] Bit
IOVC Signal for override cancel used in the PMC axis control0 : Is common signal for all group1 : Is each signal for each group
INOV Signal for feedrate override used in the PMC axis control0 : Is common signal for all group1 : Is each signal for each group
NOTEWhen parameter No. 8009#0(IOVC) or 8009#1(INOV) is setto 0, each signal of override cancel and feedrate overridecan be selected to use same signals used for the CNC orsignals specific to the PMC by setting of parameter No.8001#2(OVE).
8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 1 to Number of Controlled axes
Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for eachPMC–controlled axis.
Value Description1 DI/DO group A (G142 to G149) is used.
2 DI/DO group B (G154 to G161) is used.
3 DI/DO group C (G166 to G173) is used.
4 DI/DO group D (G178 to G185) is used.
5 DI/DO group E (G464 to G471) is used.
6 DI/DO group F (G476 to G483) is used.
7 DI/DO group G (G488 to G495) is used.
8 DI/DO group H (G500 to G507) is used.
8022 Upper–limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data][Valid data range]
Increment system Unit dataValid data range
Increment system Unit dataIS–B IS–C
Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000
This parameter sets the upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMCaxis control.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
199
NOTEThe upper limit specified for the first axis is valid for all axes.The specifications for the second and subsequent axes areignored.
8028 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant or bell–shaped acceleration/de-celeration time constant T1 for speed command–based continuous feed underPMC axis control for each axis
[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] msec/1000 min–1
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Specify an acceleration/deceleration time constant for speedcommand–based continuous feed under PMC axis control for each axis.
(1) Set the time required in increasing or decreasing the rotation speed ofthe servo motor by 1000 min–1 as a time constant for linearacceleration/deceleration when linear acceleration/deceleration is inuse. Also reset parameter No. 8029 to 0.
(2) Set time constant T1 for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration whenbell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is used in this parameter, andtime constant T2 in parameter No. 8029. Read the followingdescriptions about parameter No. 8029 for explanations about timeconstants T1 and T2.
NOTE1 If both parameter Nos. 8028 and 8029 are reset to 0,
acceleration/deceleration control will not be performed.2 This parameter is valid when bit 7 (EA2) of parameter No.
8003 is set to 0.
8029 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant T2 for speed command–based continuous feed under PMC axis control for each axis
[Data type] Word axis[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 512
Specify bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant T2 for speedcommand–based continuous feed under PMC axis control for each axis.Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant T1 must be set inparameter No. 8028. If this parameter is 0, acceleration/deceleration forspeed command–based continuous feed under PMC axis control is linear.(In this case, the time constant set in parameter No. 8028 is used for linearacceleration/deceleration.)
NOTE1 If this parameter is 0, acceleration/deceleration control is not
performed.2 This parameter is valid when bit 7 (EA2) of parameter No.
8003 is set to 0.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
200
#7
8081
#6 #5 #4 #3
EXD
#2
TYB
#1 #0
ECM
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
ECM The electronic cam function is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
TYB The specification of the electronic cam is:0 : A1 : B
EXD The number of cam figure data items is:0 : Not increased.1 : Increased.
CAUTIONIf you change the setting of this parameter, you need to clearthe tape storage area. Before clearing it, back up the partprogram. To clear, hold down the <DELETE> key and turnon the power.
#7
8082
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
NCP
#0
[Data type] Bit
NCP In the electronic cam function, phase matching is:0 : Used.1 : Not used.
NOTEIf you want to connect the cam shaft to a tracking axis ordisconnect them during electronic cam operation, set thisparameter to “1”.
4.37PARAMETERS OFELECTRONIC CAM
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
201
8084
Type of a camshaft
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0, 1000
Set the type of a camshaft axis in the electronic cam function. If a camshaftis a master device (device sharing information between units), set theparameter to 1000.Otherwise, set the parameter to 0.
8085
Type of a follow–up axis in the electric cam function
[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0, 1000
Select a follow–up axis in the electronic cam function. Set the type (valueof parameter No. 8084) of a camshaft on the follow–up axis side. Up tofour follow–up axes can be selected.If the axis is a master device (device sharing information between units),set the parameter to 1000.Otherwise, set the parameter to 0.
8086
Axis number for a cam shaft when the electronic cam function is used
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to maximum number of control axes
Specify an axis number for a cam shaft when the electronic cam functionis used.[Example] If you want to specify the fifth axis as a cam shaft, set the
parameter to 5.
NOTEThe same axis number as for the tracking axis cannot be setin this parameter.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
202
8087
Select a tracking axis to be controlled using the electronic cam function
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0,1 to maximum number of control axes
Select a tracking axis to be controlled using the electronic cam function.Specify the axis number for the cam shaft (value set in parameter No. 8086)on the tracking axis side. Up to four tracking axes can be selected. They arethe first, second, third, and fourth tracking axis as counted from the top.[Example] To specify that the cam shaft be the fifth axis and that the
first, second, and seventh axes be set as tracking axes, set upas follows:
Parameter No.8087(First axis) =5 (First tracking axis)(Second axis) =5 (Second tracking axis)(Third axis) =0(Fourth axis) =0(Fifth axis) =0 (Cam shaft)(Sixth axis) =0(Seventh axis) =5 (Third tracking axis)(Eighth axis) =0
NOTE1 An axis number assigned to a cam shaft cannot be selected
as a tracking axis.2 Keep the bits for axes not used as tracking axes at 0.
8088
Number of cam figure data items
NOTEWhen this parameter ise set, the power must be turned offbefore operating is continued.
[Data type] Word type
[Valid data range] 3 to 2048 (When parameter No.8081#3 (EXD) is set to 0.)3 to 14999 (When parameter No.8081#3 (EXD) is set to 1.)
Set the number of cam figure data items for the electronic cam function.
CAUTIONIf you change the setting of this parameter, you need to clearthe tape storage area. Before clearing it, back up the partprogram. To clear, hold down the <DELETE> key and turnon the power.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
203
8090 Tolerance for a tracking axis speed difference at the start/end of synchronizationperformed when the electronic cam function is used
[Data type] Two–word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Specify a tolerance for a difference in speed between the cam shaft andeach tracking axis when they are connected and disconnected during theelectronic cam operation provided by the electronic cam function.Read descriptions about the electronic cam function in “ConnectionManual (Function)” for details.Set a value not lower than the result of the following expression.
Tracking axis speed (mm/min) at the start/end of synchronization7.5
[Example]Assuming the tracking axis speed (mm/min) at the start/end ofsynchronization is 360 mm/min:
360/7.5 = 48Therefore, set 48 or greater.
NOTEThis parameter is valid when phase matching is not used (bit1 (NCP) of parameter No. 8082 = 1).
8091
Allowable variations of master coordinates in positioning of an electronic cam
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Least input increment
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
Set an allowable value up to which the positioning completion signal isnot disabled even when camshaft coordinates vary upon completion ofpositioning of an electronic cam.
NOTE1 Make this setting considering the variation range of
coordinates in situations where the camshaft stops.2 When the parameter is 0, the conventional specification is
assumed.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
204
8092
Allowable variations of slave coordinates in positioning of an electronic cam
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Least input increment
[Valid data range] 0 to 65535
Set an allowable value up to which the positioning completion signal isnot disabled even when follow–up coordinates vary upon completion ofpositioning of an electronic cam.
NOTE1 Make this setting considering the variation range of the
electronic cam follow–up axis coordinates upon completionof positioning.
2 When the parameter is 0, the conventional specification isassumed.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
205
#7NWR
8100
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
NWR For two–path control, each path is:0 : Not activated separately.1 : Activated separately.
NOTEIf you want to use two–path control, set also the EEPparameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 1803) to 1.
#7MSP
8101
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
MSP In case of two–path control,0 : External operator messages correspond to message number
2000–2999 are displayed on message screen of each path commonly.And the messages correspond to message number 6000–6999 are notavailable.
1 : External operator messages correspond to message number2000–2999 are displayed on message screen of the first path side andthe messages correspond to message number 6000–6999 aredisplayed on message screen of the second path side.
NOTEWhen this parameter is set in situations where the FOCAS1(or FOCAS2) CNC/PMC data window library is used, thepower needs to be turned off and back on again.
NOTERefer to the LADDER LANGUAGE PROGRAMMINGMANUAL (B–61863EN) for further details.
4.38PARAMETERS OF TWO–PATHCONTROL
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
206
8260
Unit number
[Data type] Word
[Data] Master unit number 1Slave unit number 2 to 16Inter–unit data sharing function disabled 0
Specify a unique unit number for a unit that uses inter–unit data sharing.The master unit must be the Power Mate i–H that is connected first.This is a power–off parameter.
#7
8261
#6
SLV60
#5
SLV50
#4
SLV40
#3
SLV30
#2
SLV20
#1
SLV10
#0
SLV70
8262SLVE0 SLVD0 SLVC0 SLVB0 SLVA0 SLV90 SLV80SLVF0
[Data type] Bit
[Data] Specify a slave unit that communicates with the master unit.To share information on devices of the master unit with a slave unit,communication with the slave having unit number (X–1) through themultiaxis synchronous line is:
0 : Not performed.1 : Performed.
Specify the unit number of a slave unit with which inter–unit data isshared.For example, to communicate with the slave units with unit numbers 1and 2, set bits 1 and 2 of the parameter No. 8261 to 1.This setting is required only on the master unit side.
4.39PARAMETERSRELATED TO THEINTER–UNIT DATASHARING FUNCTION
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
207
#7
8280
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PACEM
[Data type] Bit
PACEM The pacemaker function is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
To use the pacemaker function, be sure to set this parameter to 1.
8281
Pacemaker counter value
[Data type] 2–word
[Valid data range] 41 to 99999999
Set the pacemaker counter.When the counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to 0.When 0 is set, the counter is set to 1,000,000,000.When a setting is out of range, an alarm may occur.This is a power–off parameter.
8283
Pacemaker incremental value
[Data type] 2–word
[Unit of data] 1/ms
[Valid data range] 1 to 1000
Set the count incremental value per millisecond applied when the level ofthe pacemaker override signal (described later) is 100%.
4.40PARAMETERSRELATED TO THEPACEMAKERFUNCTION
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
208
8290
Device number
[Data type] Word axis
Set the device number for a device to which pulses are to be appliedmanually.This parameter is reserved for future expansion. Set the values listedbelow for the time being.
First axis 1
Second axis 2
Third axis 3
Fourth axis 4
Fifth axis 5
Sixth axis 6
Seventh axis 7
Eighth axis 8
8291
Type of device
[Data type] Word axis
Set the type of a device to which pulses are to be applied manually.A value of 5 (device step signal) should be set for an axis for which deviceinput is to be performed.
Device type Category number
Device step signal 5
8292
Device axis magnification M
[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] -30000 to 30000
Set a magnification M for a device to which pulses are to be appliedmanually.The magnification satisfies the following expression.Pulses (P) input for a controlled axis = pulses for the device � MIf 0 or any value out of the valid data range is specified, a magnificationof 1 is assumed.
The maximum pulse count for the device is 32767 pulses, and theminimum pulse count is –32767 pulses. If P is greater than 32767,therefore, the actual pulse count is clamped at 32767.
4.41PARAMETERS OFDEVICE INPUT
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
209
8294
Device limit
[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 10000
Set a limit value per pulse for the device.If a pulse that exceeds the limit is input, clamping is made at the limitspeed.If 0 or any value out of the valid data range is specified, no limit iseffective.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Pulse
Limit
Device–inputpulse
Actually distributedpulse
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
210
#7SOF8301
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
[Data type] Bit
SOF The synchronization funciton in simple synchronous control (one pair) is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
#78302
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ATS
#0ATE
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Bit
ATE Automatic setting of grid positioning for simplified synchronous controlone pair is:0 : Disabled1 : Enabled
ATS Automatic setting of grid positioning for simplified synchronous controlone pair is:0 : Not started1 : Started
NOTE1 When the bits are set to 1, parameter No.8316 and bit 4
(APZx) of parameter No.1815 for the master and slave axesare set to 0.
2 These bits are automatically set to 0 once grid positioninghas been completed.
#7
8303
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
ASX
#0
AEXSFX
NOTEAfter this parameter has been set, the power must be turnedoff then on again for the setting to become effective.
[Data type] Bit axis
AEX In simple synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
ASX In simple synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is:0 : Not started.1 : Started.
4.42PARAMETERS OF SIMPLESYNCHRONOUSCONTROL
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
211
NOTEWhen starting automatic setting for grid positioning, set ASXto 1. Upon the completion of setting, ASX is automaticallyset to 0.
SFX In simple synchronous control, the synchronization function is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
8311 Axis number of master axis in synchronous control
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 0, 1 to Number of controlled axes
Select a master axis and slave axis in simple synchronous control. Set amaster axis number with the slave axis side. The axis number settings are:1 –> First axis, 2 –> Second axis, 3 –> Third axis, 4 –> Fourth axis. Up tofour pairs can be specified.
Example1:Simple synchronous control is exercised with one pair.When using the first axis (X–axis) as the master axis, and thethird axis (Z–axis) as the slave axis, set parameter No.8311 asfollows:
Parameter No. 8311 X (first axis) = 0Y (second axis) = 0Z (third axis) = 1A (fourth axis) = 0
Example2:Simple synchronous control is exercised with three pairs.Assume that the following three pairs are to be used:The master axis is the first axis, while a slave axis is the sixth axis.The master axis is the second axis, while a slave axis is the fifthaxis.The master axis is the third axis, while a slave axis is the fourthaxis.For this specification, set this parameter as follows:
Parameter No.8311 X (First axis) = 0Y (Second axis) = 0Z (Third axis) = 0
(Fourth axis) = 3(Fifth axis) = 2(Sixth axis) = 1
NOTEThe axis number of a master axis must always be smallerthan the corresponding slave axis number. Multiple slaveaxes cannot be assigned to a master axis.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
212
8313Limit of the difference between the amount of positioning deviation of the masterand slave axes (Synchronous control one pair)
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Set the limit of the difference between the amount of positioningdeviation of the master and slave (fourth) axes. If the difference betweenthem exceeds the limit assigned to the parameter, the P/S alarm (No.213)is activated.
8314 Maximum error in synchronization error check
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data]Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C UnitsMillimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
The machine coordinates on a master axis and slave axis are monitored. Ifa difference (synchronization error) which is greater than the valuespecified in this parameter is detected, a servo alarm (No.407) isgenerated, and the machine is stopped.
Set this parameter with a master axis. When 0 is set in this parameter, nosynchronization error check is made.
8315 Maximum compensation value for synchronization (Synchronous control one pair)
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the maximum compensation value forsynchronization. When a compensation value greater than the value setin this parameter is used, servo alarm No.407 is issued.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
213
8316Difference between reference counters for master and slave axes (Synchronous control one pair)
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
[Data type] 2–word
[Data unit] Detection unit
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
This parameter indicates the difference between the values in thereference counter for the master axis and that for the slave axis.
NOTEOnce grid positioning has been completed, the differencebetween the reference counters is automatically set in thisparameter. At this time, bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No.8302 isset to 0.
8317 Torque difference alarm detection time (Synchronous control one pair)
[Data type] Word
[Data unit] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (When 0 is set, 512 ms is assumed.)
This parameter specifies the period between the servo preparationcompletion signal (SA <F000 bit 6>) being set to 1 and the check of thetorque difference alarm being started, for the torque difference alarmdetection function.
The set value is rounded up to the nearest a multiple of 16 ms.
[Example] When 100 is specified, 112 ms is assumed.
8323Maximum allowable difference between master axis and slave axis positional deviations
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between themaster axis and slave axis position deviations. If a positional deviationdifference exceeds the value specified in this parameter, an alarm(No.213) is issued.
Set this parameter with a master axis. If 0 is specified in this parameter, noposition deviation difference check is made.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
214
8325Maximum compensation value for synchronization
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the maximum compensation value forsynchronization. If a compensation value exceeds the value specifiedwith this parameter, a servo alarm (No.407) is issued.
Specify a master axis for this parameter. To enable this parameter, set theSOFx parameter (bit 7 of parameter No.8303) to 1.
8326Difference between master axis and slave axis reference counters
[Data type] 2–word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
The difference between the master axis reference counter and slave axisreference counter (master axis and slave axis grid shift) is automaticallyset when automatic setting for grid positioning is performed. Then, thedifference is transferred together with an ordinary grid shift value to theservo system when the power is turned on.
This parameter is set with a master axis.
8327Torque difference alarm detection timer
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 0 to 4000
This parameter sets a time from the servo preparation completion signal,SA (F000#6), being set to 1 until torque difference alarm detection isstarted in simple synchronous control. A fraction of less than 16 msec isrounded up.
Example: Setting = 100: The specification of 112 msec is assumed.
Set this parameter with a master axis. If 0 is set in this parameter, thespecification of 512 msec is assumed.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
215
8380
Axis number for a parent axis used by the multiaxis synchronization function
[Data type] Word axis
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
Specify a parent axis number for a child axis under synchronizationcontrol.There is no need to specify the parent axis itself.Only one parent axis can be paired with a child axis. The child axis cannothave more than one parent axis.
8381
Type of a parent axis
[Data type] Word axis
Set the type of the parent axis of the local axis in multiaxis synchronouscontrol. An axis with a setting of 0 is not related to synchronization.
1 Servo axis, hypothetical axis4 Separate absolute position detector7 Pacemaker
100 The local axis is a parent axis and is a servo axis or hypotheticalaxis.
400 The local axis is a parent axis and a separate pulse coder.1000 Device of another Power Mate
#7
8382
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2
MCHER
#1
SCHKP
#0
[Data type] Bit axis
SCHKP When a parent axis starts operating on the start point in start pointsynchronization:0 : The child axis does not start synchronization when the parent axis is
moving in the positive direction. (The child axis startssynchronization when the parent axis is moving in the negativedirection.)
1 : The child axis starts synchronization regardless of the movementdirection of the parent axis.
MCHER Servo delay for machine coordinates is:0 : Considered.1 : Not considered.
4.43PARAMETERS OF MULTIAXISSYNCHRONIZATION
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
216
#7
8385
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NCNT
[Data type] Bit axis
NCNT The start point synchronization control command is buffered in the nextblock:0 : Overlapping with the previous block is continuously performed and
synchronization control is made successively.1 : The previous block is terminated and synchronization control is made
after the start point is reached.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
217
8396
Master device number
[Data type] Word
[Data] 1 to 8
[Data description] Set the device number of a device of the master unit that shares inter–unitdata with a slave unit.When the device type is a servo axis or separate absolute position detector,set the axis number. When it is a pacemaker, set 1.This parameter needs to be set only for the master unit.
8397
Master device type
[Data type] Word
[Data type] Servo axisSeparate absolute position detector 4Pacemaker 7
[Data description] Set the type of a device of the master unit that shares inter–unit data witha slave unit.This parameter needs to be set only for the master unit.
4.44PARAMETERSRELATED TO THEINTER–UNIT DATASHARING FUNCTION(2)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
218
#7E088500
#6E07
#5E06
#4E05
#3E04
#2E03
#1E02
#0E01
E168501 E15 E14 E13 E12 E11 E10 E09
[Data type] Bit
E01 to E16 The corresponding high–speed position switch is:0 : Enabled.1 : Disabled. (The output of the high–speed position switch signal is
always kept at 0.)
These parameters specify whether to enable or disable the correspondinghigh–speed position switches.A disabled high–speed position switch always outputs 0.The two–digit number in each parameter name represents the sequence ofthe high–speed position switch.(Example: E01 ––– setting for the first high–speed position switch. E16––– setting for the sixteenth high–speed position switch.)
#7D088504
#6D07
#5D06
#4D05
#3D04
#2D03
#1D02
#0D01
D168505 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D09
[Data type] Bit
D01 to D16 The output type of the corresponding high–speed position switch is:0 : Normal. (The machine coordinate range is used to determine whether
to output the signal.)1 : Decision by direction. (The machine coordinates and operation
direction are used to determine whether to output the signal.)
These parameters set the output types for the corresponding high–speedposition switches.The two–digit number in each parameter name represents the sequence ofthe high–speed position switch.(Example: D01 ––– setting for the first high–speed position switch. D16––– setting for the sixteenth high–speed position switch.)
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
4.45PARAMETERS OFHIGH–SPEEDPOSITION SWITCHES
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
219
#7A088508
#6A07
#5A06
#4A05
#3A04
#2A03
#1A02
#0A01
A168509 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09
[Data type] Bit
A01 to A16 The signal is turned on when the corresponding high–speed positionswitch passes through the machine coordinate position set in parameterNo. 8550 to 8565:0 : In the negative (–) direction.1 : In the positive (+) direction.
When decision by direction is selected for the output type of a high–speedposition switch in parameter No. 8550 to 8565, the correspondingparameter sets the direction.The two–digit number in each parameter name represents the sequence ofthe high–speed position switch.
For ordinary high–speed position switches, it is unnecessaryto set up this parameter.
#7B088512
#6B07
#5B06
#4B05
#3B04
#2B03
#1B02
#0B01
B168513 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09
[Data type] Bit
B01 to B16 The signal is turned off when the corresponding high–speed positionswitch passes through the machine coordinate position set in parameterNo. No.8580 to 8595:0 : In the negative (–) direction.1 : In the positive (+) direction.
When decision by direction is selected for the output type of a high–speedposition switch in parameter No.8580 to 8595, the correspondingparameter sets the direction.The two–digit number in each parameter name represents the sequence ofthe high–speed position switch.
For ordinary high–speed position switches, it is unnecessaryto set up this parameter.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
220
8516 Maximum allowable number of high–speed position switches
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 16
Specify the maximum allowable number of high–speed positionswitches.
NOTE� The number of high–speed position switches specified in
this parameter is the sum of ordinary and decision–by–direction high–speed position switches.
� To put the setting of this parameter in effect, turn the poweroff and on again.
� If a specified value is out of the valid data range, thehigh–speed position switch function is disabled.
The larger value is set in the parameter, the longer time theprocessing takes.For each switch, therefore, you should set the same numberas their switch number.However, you need to include the switches disabled usingparameter Nos. 8500 and 8501 in the number of switches.Therefore, the setting of the parameter must match thehighest high–speed position switch number to be used.
Example: When the first, fourth, and tenth high–speedposition switches are used, parameter No. 8516 must beset to 10 or greater even if the other high–speed positionswitches are disabled. In this case, you should setparameter No. 8516 to 3 to use the first, second, and thirdhigh–speed position switches if you are going to use onlythree high–speed position switches.
8517 Start address of high–speed position switch output
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1000 to 1002 (built–in I/O Y address range)
Specify the Y signal address where the first to eighth high–speed positionswitch signals are to be output. The output addresses for the ninth tosixteenth high–speed position switches are specified as the “addressspecified in parameter No. 8517 plus 1”. It is unnecessary to specifyseparate addresses for the ordinary and decision–by–directionhigh–speed position switches. Parameter Nos. 8504 and 8505 are usedto specify what bits of the output address are to be used as ordinary ordecision–by–direction high–speed position switches.
( ) Each bit of the Y address specified in this parameter is assignedto the first high–speed position switch, the second high–speedposition switch, and so on sequentially, starting at bit 0. It isimpossible to change the sequence and to skip bits.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
221
Example: If parameter No. 8516 = 16 and parameter No. 8517 = 1000,the relationships between the Y signal and the high–speed positionswitch number are as follows:
Y1000#0 ––– first high–speed position switch signalY1000#1 ––– second high–speed position switch signal
: :Y1000#7 ––– sixteenth high–speed position switch signal
It is impossible, for example, to assign Y1000#0 to the sixteenthhigh–speed position switch and to skip Y1000#1 to assign Y1000#2to the second high–speed position switch.
( ) If a nonexistent signal address is specified, the high–speed positionswitch function is disabled.
NOTE1 When high–speed position switches are to be used for both
paths in Power Mate i–D two–path control, change Y signaloutput addresses for each path separately.Example: If four high–speed position switches are used forpath 1, and other four high–speed position switches areused for path 2(Example of correct settings)
Parameters for path 1Parameter No. 8516 = 4Parameter No. 8516 = 1000 “Bits 0 to 3 of
Y1000 are used.”Parameters for path 2
Parameter No. 8516 = 4Parameter No. 8516 = 1001 “Bits 0 to 3 of Y1001
are used.”(Example of incorrect settings)The following settings are unusable.
Parameters for path 1Parameter No. 8516 = 4Parameter No. 8516 = 1000 “Bits 0 to 3 of Y1000
are used.”Parameters for path 2
Parameter No. 8516 = 4Parameter No. 8516 = 1000 <––“Bits 4 to 7 of Y1000
are used.”2 Do not use any Y signal already used on the PMC ladder.
Otherwise, the machine may behave in an unexpectedmanner.
3 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
222
8520 Axis corresponding to the first high–speed position switch
8521 Axis corresponding to the second high–speed position switch
8522 Axis corresponding to the third high–speed position switch
8523 Axis corresponding to the fourth high–speed position switch
8524 Axis corresponding to the fifth high–speed position switch
8525 Axis corresponding to the sixth high–speed position switch
8526 Axis corresponding to the seventh high–speed position switch
8527 Axis corresponding to the eighth high–speed position switch
8528 Axis corresponding to the ninth high–speed position switch
8529 Axis corresponding to the tenth high–speed position switch
8530 Axis corresponding to the tenth high–speed position switch
8531 Axis corresponding to the eleventh high–speed position switch
8532 Axis corresponding to the twelveth high–speed position switch
8533 Axis corresponding to the tirteenth high–speed position switch
8534 Axis corresponding to the fifteenth high–speed position switch
8535 Axis corresponding to the sixteenth high–speed position switch
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0,1,2,3,..., Number of controlled axes
These parameters specify the axis control numbers corresponding to thefirst to sixteenth high–speed position switches.Set 0 for the number corresponding to a high–speed position switch whichis not to be used.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
223
8550 Maximum value of the operation range of the first high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the first high–speed position switch is turnedon (for direction reversing type)
8551 Maximum value of the operation range of the third high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the third high–speed position switch is turnedon (for direction reversing type)
8552 Maximum value of the operation range of the third high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the third high–speed position switch is turnedon (for direction reversing type)
8553 Maximum value of the operation range of the fourth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the fourth high–speed position switch isturned on (for direction reversing type)
8554 Maximum value of the operation range of the fifth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the fifth high–speed position switch is turnedon (for direction reversing type)
8555 Maximum value of the operation range of the sixth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the sixth high–speed position switch isturned on (for direction reversing type)
8556 Maximum value of the operation range of the seventh high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the seventh high–speed positionswitch is turned on (for direction reversing type)
8557 Maximum value of the operation range of the eighth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the eighth high–speed position switch isturned on (for direction reversing type)
8558 Maximum value of the operation range of the ninth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the ninth high–speed position switch isturned on (for direction reversing type)
8559 Maximum value of the operation range of the tenth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the tenth high–speed position switch isturned on (for direction reversing type)
8560 Maximum value of the operation range of the eleventh high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the eleventh high–speed positionswitch is turned on (for direction reversing type)
8561 Maximum value of the operation range of the twelveth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the twelveth high–speed positionswitch is turned on (for direction reversing type)
8562 Maximum value of the operation range of the thirteenth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the thirteenth high–speed positionswitch is turned on (for direction reversing type)
8563 Maximum value of the operation range of the fourteenth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the fourteenth high–speed positionswitch is turned on (for direction reversing type)
8564 Maximum value of the operation range of the fifteenth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the fifteenth high–speed positionswitch is turned on (for direction reversing type)
8565 Maximum value of the operation range of the sixteenth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the sixteenth high–speed positionswitch is turned on (for direction reversing type)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
224
[Data type] Two–word
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
– For normal type
Maximum value (machine coordinate value) of the operation range ofthe first to sixteenth high–speed position switches
If you make such a setting which causes the maximum value is lessthan the minimum value, will result, the range of operation isnarrowed, making the high–speed position switched inoperable.
– For direction reversing type
Position where the first to sixteenth position switches are turned on
The high–speed position switches change their states only when thetool passes these machine coordinates in the direction specified inparameter Nos. 8508 and 8509 (bit).
NOTEThe same parameters are used to set the upper limit for theoperation range of the ordinary high–speed positionswitches and the machine coordinates where the decision–by–direction high–speed position switches become ON. Becareful not to make incorrect settings.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
225
8580 Minimum value of the operation range of the first high–speed position switch (fornormal type) or position where the first high–speed position switch is turned off(for direction reversing type)
8581 Minimum value of the operation range of the second high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the second high–speed position switch isturned off (for direction reversing type)
8582 Minimum value of the operation range of the third high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the third high–speed position switch is turnedoff (for direction reversing type)
8583 Minimum value of the operation range of the fourth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the fourth high–speed position switch isturned off (for direction reversing type)
8584 Minimum value of the operation range of the fifth high–speed position switch (fornormal type) or position where the fifth high–speed position switch is turned off(for direction reversing type)
8585 Minimum value of the operation range of the sixth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the sixth high–speed position switch isturned off (for direction reversing type)
8586 Minimum value of the operation range of the seventh high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the seventh high–speed position switch isturned off (for direction reversing type)
8587 Minimum value of the operation range of the eighth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the eighth high–speed position switch isturned off (for direction reversing type)
8588 Minimum value of the operation range of the ninth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the ninth high–speed position switch isturned off (for direction reversing type)
8589 Minimum value of the operation range of the tenth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the tenth high–speed position switch isturned off (for direction reversing type)
8590 Minimum value of the operation range of the eleventh high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the eleventh high–speed positionswitch is turned off (for direction reversing type)
8591 Minimum value of the operation range of the twelveth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the twelveth high–speed positionswitch is turned off (for direction reversing type)
8592 Minimum value of the operation range of the thirteenth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the thirteenth high–speed positionswitch is turned off (for direction reversing type)
8593 Minimum value of the operation range of the fourteenth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the fourteenth high–speed positionswitch is turned off (for direction reversing type)
8594 Minimum value of the operation range of the fifteenth high–speed position switch(for normal type) or position where the fifteenth high–speed position switch isturned off (for direction reversing type)
8595 Minimum value of the operation range of the sixteenth high–speed positionswitch (for normal type) or position where the sixteenth high–speed positionswitch is turned off (for direction reversing type)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
226
[Data type] Two–word
[Unit of data]
Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
– For normal type
Minimum value (machine coordinate value) of the operation range ofthe first to sixteenth high–speed position switches
If you make such a setting which causes the maximum value is lessthan the minimum value, the range of operation is narrowed, makingthe high–speed position switched inoperable.
– For direction reversing type
Position where the first to sixteenth position switches are turned off
The high–speed position switches change their states only when thetool passes these machine coordinates in the direction specified inparameter Nos. 8512 and 8513 (bit).
NOTEThe same parameters are used to set the lower limit for theoperation range of the ordinary high–speed positionswitches and the machine coordinates where the decision–by–direction high–speed position switches become OFF.Be careful not to make incorrect settings.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
227
#78650
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1CNA
#0RSK
[Data type] Bit
RSK When the RESET key is pressed, the key code is:0 : Not passed to the application.1 : Passed to the application.
CNA When an NC alarm is issued during the display of the user screen for the Cexecutor:0 : The NC alarm screen can be displayed depending on the setting of bit
7 (NPA) of parameter No.3111.1 : The NC alarm screen is not displayed.
NOTEThis parameter is used with the C executor. Any modificationsto the value set for this parameter does not become effectiveuntil after the system is next powered on.
#78653
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2CM3
#1CM2
#0CM1
[Data type] Bit
CM1 When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key(NOTE 2) is pushed, the user screenthat was defined as CRT_USR_AUX is0 : Not displayed.1 : Displayed.
CM2 When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key(NOTE 2) is pushed, the user screenthat was defined as CRT_USR_MCR is0 : Not displayed.1 : Displayed
CM3 When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key(NOTE 2) is pushed, the user screenthat was defined as CRT_USR_MENU is0 : Not displayed.1 : Displayed.
Symbols in a source file set which user screen is displayed. The following table shows relation between symbols and parameters.
Parameters Symbols
CM1 CRT_USR_AUX
CM2 CRT_USR_MCR
CM3 CRT_USR_MENU
4.46PARAMETERS OF CLANGUAGEEXECUTOR ANDMACRO EXECUTOR
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
228
The symbols mean following screens.
� CRT_USR_AUX: a screen displayed with a push of[CUSTOM/GRAPH] key.
� CRT_USR_MCR: a screen displayed with twice push of[CUSTOM/GRAPH] key.
� CRT_USR_MENU: a screen displayed with three times push of[CUSTOM/GRAPH] key.
These screens are changed with a push of [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key. Thescreens, whose parameter is set to ”0” are skipped.
NOTE1 When the Macro Executor option is effective, these
parameters are invalid.2 The virtual–key to switch to FANUC PICTURE screen can be
assigned by the parameter 3195#0, when the LCD unit withtouch panel is used.
8661 Variable–area size
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] KByte
[Valid data range] 0 to 59
Specify the size of a static variable area that is sharable among tasks in1 Kbyte units. The maximum size that can be specified is 59 Kbytes.However, keep the sum of the SRAM Disk size and this value at or below“usable SRAM size – 1” Kbytes (that is, 63 Kbytes).
NOTEIf the setting of this parameter is changed, the contents of thevariable area and SRAM Disk are initialized. The change isput in effect next time the power is turned on.
8662 SRAM Disk size
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] KByte
[Valid data range] 4 to 63
Specify the size of the SRAM Disk in 1 Kbyte units, using a value of 4Kbytes or greater. The maximum size that can be specified is 63 Kbytes.However, keep the sum of the variable–area size and this value at or below(usable SRAM size – 1) Kbytes (that is, 63 Kbytes).
NOTEIf the setting of this parameter is changed, the contents of thevariable area and SRAM Disk are initialized. The change isput in effect next time the power is turned on.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
229
8663 Time zone setting
[Data type] Two–word
[Unit of data] Second
[Valid data range] –12 � 3600 to 12 � 3600
Specify the time difference between the Japan standard time and theGreenwich Mean Time in second units. The time difference is –9 hours.(Setting value : –9 �3600 = –32400)
NOTEThis parameter is for C language executor.The change is put in effect next time the power is turned on.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
230
#7
8680
#6 #5 #4
HOVZ
#3
HECF
#2 #1
SSRT
#0
TSRTHSKZ
[Data type] Bit
TSRT When a skip command block with G31 P98 or P101 to P126 is skipped bytorque limit condition,0 : Servo following error and error of acceleration/deceleration are
reflected to skip position.1 : Servo following error and error of acceleration/deceleration are not
reflected to skip position.
The relation between this parameter and the parameter No.6201#2(TSE)is shown in the following table.
TSE TSRT Reflection of servofollowing error
Reflection of error ofacceleration/deceleration
0 0 Is done. Is done.
0 1 Is not done. Is not done.
1 0 Is not done. Is done.
1 1 Is not done. Is not done.
SSRT When a skip command block with G31 P1 to P26 or P101 to P126 isskipped by skip signal,0 : Servo following error and error of acceleration/deceleration are not
reflected to skip position.1 : Servo following error and error of acceleration/deceleration are
reflected to skip position.
HECF In the continuous feed (G135.1) function, the time constant foracceleration/deceleration:0 : Does not use parameters No. 1644 and No. 1645. (In the conventional
specification, parameters No. 1635 and No. 1638 are used.)1 : Uses parameters No. 1644 and No. 1645.
HOVZ During execution of the time constant specification feed function(G135.3) in the high–speed response mode, override 0% specification is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
HSKZ In case of skip function in high speed response mode, smoothing zerocheck and in–position check between commandblocks are:0 : Performed.1 : Not performed.
NOTEWhen ”1” (not performed) is set to this parameter, overrideand automatic acceleration/deceleration is effective to a skipcommand regardless of setting value of the parameter SKF(No.6200#7).
4.47PARAMETERS OFHIGH–SPEEDRESPONSE (1)
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
231
#7
8681
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
HRWR
#0
[Data type] Bit
HRWR The absolute position during execution of a motion program in thehigh–speed response mode and one byte of R (internal relay) data of thePMC used as the counter in updating the remaining amount of movementare:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
NOTEWhen at least one of these parameters is set, the powermust be turned off before operation is continued.
8686
Number of programs that can be concurrently executed with the high–speed re-sponse function
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number of programs
[Valid data range] 0 to 8
NOTEWhen 0 is set, the maximum number of programs that canbe concurrently executed is equal to the number of controlaxes.
8691
Top number of sub–program number
[Data type] 2–word
[Valid data range] 1 to 9999 In case program number O4 digits1 to 99999999 In case program number O8 digits
But 8000 to 8031 assigned to main program can not be specified.Set the start number of sub–programs used in the high–speed responsemode.
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, the power must be turned offbefore operation is continued. Also be sure to recompile programs after the power on.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
232
8692
Total number of sub–program
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 1 to 250
Set the number of sub–programs used in the high–speed response mode.
NOTE1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued. Also be sure to recompile programs after the power on.
2 Part program storage is required for making program.Registered total program number included in basic functionis 63. So specify enough capacity of part program storageand total program number according to your program.
3 The area that includes main program number (O8000 toO8031) can not be specified as the area of sub–program. Ifsuch is set, sub–program calling function can not be used.Ex) The following setting (Specify O7900 to O8099 as
sub–program number) is forbidden.Parameter No. 8691 = 7900Parameter No. 8692 = 200
4 When these parameter, No.8691 and No.8692, is not setcorrectly, sub–program calling function can not be used.
Main programs and sub–programs are protected from editing/displayingby setting the following parameters. Parameter No.3202#0 (NE8), #4 (NE9), parameter No.3204#3 (P8E), #4(P9E)
� In case sub–program numbers are within 8032 to 8999(The area of sub–program number is specified by the parameterNo.8691 and No.8692)If NE8=1, a compile error 1824 occurs at compiling.
� In case sub–program numbers are within 8032 to 9999. If NE8=1 and NE9=1, a compile error 1824 occurs at compiling.
� In case sub–program numbers are within 80000000 to 89999999 If NE8=1 and P8E=1, a compile error 1824 occurs at compiling.
� In case sub–program numbers are within 90000000 to 99999999.If NE8=1 and P9E=1, a compile error 1824 occurs at compiling.
In case you start to compile only one program by an external signal, acompile error 1824 occurs if the program is protected by the above setting.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
233
8693
Absolute position during execution of a motion program in the high–speed responsemode and one byte of R (internal relay) data of the PMC used as the counter in
updating the remaining amount of movement
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range] Available range of R (internal relay) data of the PMC
NOTE1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.2 When bit 1 (HRWR) of parameter No. 8681 is set to 1, never
write the R (internal relay) data of the PCM specified by thisparameter.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
234
#78701
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2WPR
#1PLD
#0
[Data type] Bit
PLD When the P–code loader function is used (macro compiler/executor):0 : AM is initialized and the entire contents of RAM are rewritten.1 : RAM is not initialized, being overwritten instead
WPR The function that allows parameters that are rewritten using the PMCwindow to be enabled during automatic operation is:0 : Disabled.1 : Enabled.
#78705
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1ADC
#0
[Data type] Bit
ADC 0 : Does not use the analog input module.1 : Uses the analog input module.
#7
8706
#6 #5
CPL
#4
HMD
#3
APMCD
#2
HMC
#1 #0
[Data type] Bit
NOTEAfter setting this parameter, turn the power off then on againso that the setting will take effect.
HMC The macro statement in high response function is0 : Not available1 : Available
APMCD In the system that the high speed response function is enabled, thevariables from #1245 to #1995 in the normal mode are0 : Not available1 : Available
CPL In the high–speed response function, the signal–based compile function is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
HMD In the high–speed response function, an auxiliary function is:0 : Not used.1 : Used.
4.48OTHERPARAMETERS
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
235
8730 Input voltage offset for the analog input module
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] 1.22 mV
[Valid data range] 0 to +8191This parameter specifies an offset for a voltage applied from the analoginput module. Specify 0 V so that the value of diagnostic data No. 833becomes 0.
#7
8731
#6
EP6
#5
EP5
#4
EP4
#3
EP3
#2
EP2
#1
EP1
#0
EP0EP7
[Data type] Bit
EPn The signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is0 : Used for high–speed skip function or measuring function by using
high–speed skip signal1 : Used for interrupt type PMC
NOTE1 Changes to this setting take effect the next time the power
is turned on.2 The same signal cannot be used by the measuring function
by high–speed skip signal and the interrupt type PMCfunction at the same time.
3 This parameter must be set to 0, when the above functionsare not used.
#7
8732
#6
UP6
#5
UP5
#4
UP4
#3
UP3
#2
UP2
#1
UP1
#0
UP0UP7
[Data type] Bit
UPn The rising edge (0 → 1) of the signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is :0 : Not used for interrupt type PMC or high–speed skip signal.1 : Used for interrupt type PMC or high–speed skip signal.
NOTEChanges to this setting take effect the next time the poweris turned on.
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
236
#7
8733
#6
DN6
#5
DN5
#4
DN4
#3
DN3
#2
DN2
#1
DN1
#0
DN0DN7
[Data type] Bit
DNn The falling edge (1 → 0) of the signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is0 : Not used for interrupt type PMC or high–speed skip signal1 : Used for interrupt type PMC or high–speed skip signal.
NOTEChanges to this setting take effect the next time the poweris turned on.
8745
Start address for the PMC internal relay used in M code output
[Data type] Two–word
[Valid data range] 0 to the number of bytes usable in the R area
Set the start address for the PMC internal relay (R area) to be used by thehigh–speed response function for M code output. (A 32–byte area startingat the specified address is used by the high–speed response function as anM code output area.)
8746
Start address for the PMC internal relay by the high–speed response function
[Data type] Two–word type
[Valid data range] 0 to the number of bytes usable in the R area
Set the start address for the PMC internal relay (R area) to be used by thehigh–speed response function signal–based compile function. (A16–byte area starting at the specified address is used by the high–speedresponse function signal–based compile function.)Supposing this parameter is set to xxx, each item of data is assigned asfollows:
NOTEA system program–managed area cannot be specified inthis parameter.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
237
Rxxx+0
Rxxx+4
Rxxx+8
Rxxx+12
(input)
(output)
(output)
(output)
Program to be compiled (If 0is specified, all programs willbe compiled.)Program number where acompile error has occurred
Block number where a com-pile error has occurred
Compile error code
NOTEIn the above table, an area indicated as “output” is intendedfor output. The PMC must handle it as read–only.
8760 Program number for registering data for slaves (I/O Link–based data input/out-put function)
[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 9999
Set the program number of a program for registering data (parameters,macro variables, and diagnose (PMC) data) from slaves by the I/OLink–based data input/output function.Use a program number determined by:
Parameter for slaves in group n: Setting + n � 10 + 0Macro variable for slaves in group n: Setting + n � 10 + 1Diagnose (PMC) data for slaves in group n: Setting + n � 10 + 2
(Example) If the parameter is set to 8000:[Program number] [Type of data saved as program]
8000: Parameter in group 0 (I/O CHANNEL = 20)8001: Macro variable in group 0 (I/O CHANNEL = 20)8002: Diagnose (PMC) data in group 0 (I/O CHANNEL = 20)8010: Parameter in group 1 (I/O CHANNEL = 21)8011: Macro variable in group 1 (I/O CHANNEL = 21)8012: Diagnose (PMC) data in group 1 (I/O CHANNEL = 21)8020: Parameter in group 2 (I/O CHANNEL = 22)8021: Macro variable in group 2 (I/O CHANNEL = 22)8022: Diagnose (PMC) data in group 2 (I/O CHANNEL = 22)
: :: :: :
8150: Parameter in group 15 (I/O CHANNEL = 35)8151: Macro variable in group 15 (I/O CHANNEL = 35)8152: Diagnose (PMC) data in group 15 (I/O CHANNEL = 35)
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
238
#78761
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0EIB
[Data type] Bit
EIB External I/O Device Control Function is:0 : The former way.1 : The enhanced way.
NOTESet this bit to 0, when ”Data input/output function via I/O Link(Master)” or ”Data input/output function via I/O Link (Slave)”is applied.
8781 Size of DRAM used by FANUC PICTURE or C executor
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] 64 Kbytes
[Valid data range] 16 to 128
Set the size of DRAM used by FANUC PICTURE or C executor.If a specified value is out of the valid data range, 0 is assumed.
The following table lists the relationships between the parameter valuesand a combination of C executor options and FANUC PICTURE
Settingvalue
C languageexecutor
Additionalcapacity for C
executorprogram
capacity, 1 MB
Additionalcapacity for C
executorprogram
capacity, 2 MB
Touch panelcontrol(FANUC
PICTURE)
16 �
32 � �
48 � �
96 �
96 � �
112 � � �
128 � � �
NOTE1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.2 The size of DRAM that can be used actually is limited by the
DRAM capacity and what option is installed.
B–63180EN/03 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
239
8790 Timing for executing an auxiliary macro
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data]This parameter sets the timing for executing a macro executor auxiliarymacro while NC programs, offset data, and so forth are being read orpunched out.
When as many characters as the number specified with this parameter areread or punched out, an auxiliary macro is executed once. When 0 is set inthis parameter, no auxiliary macro is executed during read or punchprocessing.
#78850
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0MDG
[Data type] Bit
MDG Trouble diagnosis function is:0 : Available.1 : Not available.
#7TRS88853
#6TRS7
#5TRS6
#4TRS5
#3TRS4
#2TRS3
#1TRS2
#0TRS1
[Data type] Bit
TRS1 to TRS8 Trouble forecast of thermal simulation of servo axis is:0 : Not available.1 : Available.
#7FIN88854
#6FIN7
#5FIN6
#4FIN5
#3FIN4
#2FIN3
#1FIN2
#0FIN1
[Data type] Bit
FIN1 to FIN8 Trouble forecast of disturbance torque of servo axis is:0 : Not available.1 : Available.
8860 Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 – 100%
8861 Trouble forecast level for disturbance torque
[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 – 100%
4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63180EN/03
240
#713110
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0JPN
[Data type] Bit
JPN Language used in the trouble diagnosis0 : English is prior.1 : Japanese is prior.
NOTEWhen this parameter is set, power must be turned off beforeoperation is continued.
APPENDIX
B–63180EN/03 A. CHARACTER CODE LISTAPPENDIX
243
ACHARACTER CODE LIST
Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ” 034 Quotation marks
G 071 # 035 Shape
H 072 $ 036 Dollar mark
I 073 % 037 Percent
J 074 & 038 Ampersand
K 075 ’ 039 Apostrophe
L 076 ( 040 Left parenthesis
M 077 ) 041 Right parenthesis
N 078 * 042 Asterisk
O 079 + 043 Positive sign
P 080 , 044 Comma
Q 081 – 045 Negative sign
R 082 . 046 Period
S 083 / 047 Slash
T 084 : 058 Colon
U 085 ; 059 Semicolon
V 086 < 060 Left angle bracket
W 087 = 061 Equal sign
X 088 > 062 Right angle bracket
Y 089 ? 063 Question mark
Z 090 @ 064 Commercial at mark
0 048 [ 091 Left square bracket
1 049 ¥ 092 Yen mark
2 050 ] 093 Right square bracket
3 051 ^ 094
4 052 _ 095 Underline
5 053
IndexB–63180EN/03
i–1
[C]Character Code List, 243
[D]Description of Parameters, 7
Displaying Parameters, 1
[I]Inputting and Outputting Parameters Through the
Reader/Puncher Interface, 4
Inputting Parameters through the Reader/Puncher In-terface, 6
[O]Other Parameters, 234
Outputting Parameters Through the Reader/PuncherInterface, 5
[P]Parameter of canned Cycle for Drilling, 139
Parameters Common to all Channels, 13
Parameters of Acceleration/Deceleration Control, 45
Parameters of Axis Control by PMC, 194
Parameters of Axis Control/Increment System, 26
Parameters of C Language Executor and MacroExecutor, 227
Parameters of Canned Cycles, 139
Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0), 14
Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1), 15
Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2), 15
Parameters of Coordinates, 34
Parameters of Custom Macros, 154
Parameters of Device Input, 208
Parameters of DI/DO, 89
Parameters of Displaying Operation Time and Num-ber of Parts, 174
Parameters of DPL/MDI Operation Package and DPL/MDI, 19
Parameters of Electronic CAM, 200
Parameters of Ethernet (For DPL/MDI OperationPackage and DPL/MDI), 21
Parameters of External Data Input/Output, 173
Parameters of Feedrate, 39
Parameters of High–speed Position Switches, 218
Parameters of High–Speed Response (1), 230
Parameters of I/O Link–II, 16
Parameters of Manual Handle Feed, Handle Interrup-tion Direction, 180
Parameters of MDI, Display, and Edit, 95
Parameters of Multiaxis Synchronization, 215
Parameters of Pattern Data Input, 159
Parameters of Picture Display, 173
Parameters of Pitch Error Compensation (OptionalFunction with Power Mate i–H), 115
Parameters of Polar Coordinate Interpolation, 152
Parameters of Position Switch Functions, 178
Parameters of Positioning by Optimum Acceleration,160
Parameters of Power Mate CNC Manager, 24
Parameters of Programs, 111
Parameters of Pulse Signal Output Function, 93
Parameters of Reader/Puncher Interface, 12
Parameters of Reference Position Setting with Me-chanical Stopper, 184
Parameters of Rigid Tapping, 141
Parameters of Servo, 61
Parameters of Setting , 9
Parameters of Simple Synchronous Control, 210
Parameters of Skip Function, 164
Parameters of Software Operator’s Panel, 186
Parameters of Spindle Control, 121
Parameters of Straightness Compensation, 153
Parameters of Stroke Check, 37
Parameters of the External Pulse Input, 192
Parameters of Tool Compensation, 138
Parameters of Two–path Control, 205
Parameters Related to the Inter–Unit Data SharingFunction, 206
Parameters Related to the Inter–Unit Data SharingFunction (2), 217
Parameters Related to the Pacemaker Function, 207
[S]Setting Parameters from MDI, 2
Rev
isio
n R
eco
rd
FAN
UC)��*��+���
i!+&,�-,./
PA
RA
ME
TE
R M
AN
UA
L (
B–6
3180
EN
)
03S
ep.,
2005
�A
dditi
on o
f par
amet
ers
rela
ted
to fo
llow
ing
func
tions
:–
Pul
se s
igna
l out
put f
unct
ion
– M
cod
e si
gnal
dire
ct o
utpu
t fun
ctio
n–
Inte
r–un
it da
ta s
harin
g fu
nctio
n–
Pac
emak
er fu
nctio
n
�A
dditi
on o
f oth
er p
aram
eter
s
02D
ec.,
2001
�A
dditi
on o
f par
amet
ers
rela
ted
to fo
llow
ing
func
tions
: E
ther
net,
FS
SB
I/O
mod
ule,
Str
aigh
tnes
s co
mpe
nsat
ion,
Opt
imum
acc
eler
atio
n, E
lect
roni
c ca
m, D
evic
e In
put,
Mul
ti-ax
is s
ynch
roni
zatio
n, a
nd H
igh–
spee
d po
sitio
n sw
itch
�M
odifi
catio
n of
follo
win
g ite
mS
ettin
g ex
ampl
e of
par
amet
er r
elat
ed to
FS
SB
01M
ar.,
1998
Edi
tion
Dat
eC
onte
nts
Edi
tion
Dat
eC
onte
nts